MINI
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with
your MINI.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
© 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 X/17, 11 17 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 284.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the follow‐
ing Owner's Manuals: Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle, Online Owner's Manual,
MINI Driver's Guide app.
6 Information
AT A GLANCE
16 Cockpit
20 Central Information Display (CID)
29 Voice activation system
32 General settings
43 Owner's Manual media
47 MINI eDRIVE
49 Safety of the hybrid system
CONTROLS
52 Opening and closing
73 Settings
84 Transporting children safely
89 Driving
109 Displays
130 Lights
136 Safety
155 Driving stability control systems
159 Driving comfort
177 Climate control
186 Interior equipment
193 Storage compartments
196 Cargo area
DRIVING TIPS
206 Things to remember when driving
211 Saving fuel
MOBILITY
218 Charging the vehicle
226 Refueling
229 Fuel
231 Wheels and tires
246 Engine compartment
249 Engine oil
253 Coolant
255 Maintenance
257 Replacing components
267 Breakdown assistance
272 Care
REFERENCE
280 Technical data
282 Appendix
284 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Information
Using this Owner's
Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the follow‐
ing Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Additional sources of in‐
formation
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
The Owner's Manual and general Information
about MINI, for example on technology, are
available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display. Additional in‐
formation, refer to page 43.
MINI Motorer’s Guide app
The app specifically describes features and
functions found in the vehicle. The app can be
displayed on smartphones and tablets. Addi‐
tional information, refer to page 44.
Online Owner's Manual
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle. The Online Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played in any of today's browsers. Additional
information, refer to page 45.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be followed. To
avoid the possibility of personal injury
and serious damage to the vehicle.
◄ End of a specific item of information.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
"..." Control Display texts used to select
individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the
voice activation system..
››...‹‹ Answers generated by the voice
activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Refers to the relevant section of this
Owner's Manual for further information on a
particular part or assembly.
The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate
that incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or
of orange-colored high-voltage components
results in the risk of life-threatening injury from
electric shock.
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
not available in your vehicle, for example be‐
cause of the selected optional features or the
country-specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer
any questions that you may have about the
features and options applicable to your vehicle.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
For Your Own Safety
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische
Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.
Intended use
Follow the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
ments.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might
be necessary to adapt your vehicle to poten‐
tially differing operating conditions and regis‐
tration requirements. If your vehicle does not
comply with the homologation requirements in
a certain country you may not be able to lodge
warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further
information on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
MINI dealer’s service center. If you choose to
use another service facility, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends use of a facility that
performs work, for instance maintenance and
repair, according to MINI specifications with
properly trained personnel, referred to in this
Owner's Manual as "another qualified service
center or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐
sequent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
the use of parts and accessory products ap‐
proved by the manufacturer of the MINI.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
their use and installation are available from a
MINI dealer's service center.
MINI parts and accessories were tested by the
manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and
suitability in MINI vehicles.
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants gen‐
uine MINI parts and accessories.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate whether each individual product from
another manufacturer can be used with MINI
vehicles without presenting a safety hazard,
even if a country-specific official approval was
issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not evaluate whether these products are suita‐
ble for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth de‐
fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is
operated under those conditions. If you wish to
operate your vehicle in another country or re‐
gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐
cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable war‐
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
or region. In such case, please contact Cus‐
tomer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ MINI Maintenance system.
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not
covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐
ranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the
vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the ve‐
hicle to function safely or provide assistance
during driving, for instance driver assistance
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
systems. Furthermore, control devices facilitate
comfort or infotainment functions.
Electronic control devices contain data memo‐
ries, which are able to temporarily or perma‐
nently store information about the condition of
the vehicle, component load, maintenance re‐
quirements, technical events or faults.
This information generally records the state of a
component, a module, a system or the environ‐
ment, for instance:
▷ Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐
tery status.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, trans‐
verse acceleration, engaged safety belt in‐
dicator.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
components, for instance lights and brakes.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
gagement of the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
The data is required to perform the control de‐
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to
recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps
the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle
functions. The majority of this data is transient
and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
Only a small proportion of the data is stored in
event or fault memories and, if needed, in the
vehicle key.
Reading out data
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
service processes, warranty cases, and quality
assurance measures, this technical information
can be read out from the vehicle together with
the vehicle identification number. A dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop can read out the information.
The socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis re‐
quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out
the data. The data is collected, processed, and
used by the relevant organizations in the serv‐
ice network. The data documents the technical
conditions of the vehicle, helps in locating
faults and improving quality, and is transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer, if needed.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with product
liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle
manufacturer needs technical data from the
vehicle. Fault and event memories in the vehi‐
cle can be reset when a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop performs repair or servicing work.
Data on the scope of servicing work performed
and maintenance records are stored in the ve‐
hicle by means of the service history and trans‐
ferred to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle
owner can contact a dealer's service center to
object to the data being stored and transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer. This objection ap‐
plies for as long as the vehicle owner remains
the proprietor of the vehicle.
Data entry and data transfer into the
vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
data can be transferred into the vehicle when
using comfort and infotainment functions,
for instance:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated multi‐
media system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction
with an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or
is found on a device that has been connected
to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
it can be deleted at any time. This data is only
transmitted to third parties if expressly desired.
This depends on the personal settings selected
for using online services.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing comfort and individual settings can be
stored in the vehicle and modified at any time,
for instance:
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel po‐
sitions.
▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
▷ Individual settings, for instance lighting in
the car's interior.
Control via mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile
devices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements. The sound and picture from
the mobile device can be played back and dis‐
played through the multimedia system. Certain
information is transferred to the mobile device
at the same time. Depending on the type of
connection, this includes, for instance position
data and other general vehicle information.
This optimizes the way in which selected apps,
for instance navigation or music playback,
work.
There is no further interaction between the mo‐
bile device and the vehicle, for instance active
access to vehicle data. How the data will be
processed further is determined by the provider
of the particular app being used. The extent of
the possible settings depends on the respective
app and the operating system of the mobile
device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, this enables data to be exchanged be‐
tween the vehicle and other systems. The wire‐
less network connection is realized via an in-
vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via
personal mobile devices brought into the vehi‐
cle, for instance smartphones. This wireless net‐
work connection enables 'online functions' to
be used. These include online services and apps
supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by
other providers.
Services from the vehicle manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle manu‐
facturer are concerned, the corresponding
functions are described in the appropriate
place, for instance the Owner's Manual or man‐
ufacturer's website. The relevant legal informa‐
tion pertaining to data protection is provided
there too. Personal data may be used to per‐
form online services. Data is exchanged over a
secure connection, for instance with the IT sys‐
tems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for
this purpose. Any collection, processing, and
use of personal data above and beyond that
needed to provide the services must always be
based on a legal permission, contractual ar‐
rangement or consent.
In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates
anonymized information on transport infra‐
structure and how the infotainment system is
used. This information cannot be traced back to
individual vehicles or people. Evaluating the
data enables the manufacturer to further im‐
prove its products or services, for instance by
incorporating the most up-to-date traffic bulle‐
tins. The data transfer feature can be deacti‐
vated in the vehicle. Certain services and func‐
tions, some of which are subject to a charge,
can be deactivated by the driver. It is also pos‐
sible to activate or deactivate the data connec‐
tion as a whole. That is, with the exception of
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
functions and services required by law such as
Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other provid‐
ers, these services are the responsibility of the
relevant provider and subject to their data pri‐
vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle
manufacturer has no influence on the content
exchanged during this process. Information on
the way in which personal data is collected and
used in relation to services from third parties,
the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be
obtained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
The vehicle identification number can be found
on the type label, on the right-hand side of the
vehicle.
Seite 12
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 13
Information
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
WATCH ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Cockpit
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 69
2 Exterior mirror operation 81
3 Buttons of the central locking system 57
4 Lights
Front fog lights 133
Light switch 130
Lights off
Daytime running lights 132
Parking lights 130
Low beams 130
Automatic headlight control 131
Cornering light 132
High-beam Assistant 132
Instrument lighting 133
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Seite 16
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Camera-based cruise control on/
off 159
Cruise control on/off 165
Cruise control: store speed
Pausing, continuing cruise control
Cruise control: increase speed
Cruise control: reduce speed
Camera-based cruise control: re‐
duce distance
Camera-based cruise control: in‐
crease distance
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 97
High beams, head‐
light flasher 97
High-beam Assistant 132
Canada: roadside parking
light 131
Onboard Computer 121
7 Instrument cluster 109
8 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 101
Rain sensor 102
Cleaning windows 99
Rear window wiper 100
Clean the rear window 100
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Voice activation 29
Telephone
Confirm the selection 121
Move selection up 121
Move selection down 121
Increase volume
Reduce volume
10 Horn, entire surface
11 Adjust the steering wheel 83
12 Unlock hood 247
13 Operate the tailgate 60
Seite 17
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
14 Tank vent 226
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Hazard warning system 267
Intelligent Safety 146
2 Control Display 20
3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 193
5 Climate control 177
6 PDC Park Distance Control 167
Rearview camera 170
Parking assistant 173
eDRIVE 92
Starting/stopping the engine,
switching drive-ready state
modes and the ignition on/
off 89
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 155
MINI Driving Modes switch 157
7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 105
8 Controller with buttons 21
9 Parking brake 95
Seite 18
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Central Information Display (CID)
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) combines
the functions of a multitude of switches. These
functions can be operated via the Controller or
touchscreen.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information sys‐
tems and communication devices while driving
can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only use the systems or devices when the
traffic situation allows. If necessary, stop and
use the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.◀
Control elements
Overview
1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
structions, refer to page 275.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐
perature is reduced, for instance through shade
or air conditioning, the normal functions are re‐
stored.
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in the area in the front of the
Control Display can shift and damage the Con‐
trol Display. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not place objects in the area in front of
the Control Display.◀
Switching on
1.
Switch on the ignition.
Seite 20
AT A GLANCE
Central Information Display (CID)
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
2. Press the Controller.
Switching off
1.
Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller with navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some functions of the Central Information Dis‐
play (CID) can be operated using the touchpad
on the Controller, refer to page 26:
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: open recently used me‐
nus.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for navi‐
gation.
Open navigation map.
Open the previous display.
Open the Options menu.
Seite 21
Central Information Display (CID)
AT A GLANCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Controller without navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some functions of the Central Information Dis‐
play (CID) can be operated using the touchpad
on the Controller, refer to page 26:
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in two directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: open recently used me‐
nus.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open the previous display.
Open the Options menu.
Operating with the Con‐
troller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All Central Information Display (CID) functions
can be called up via the main menu.
Seite 22
AT A GLANCE
Central Information Display (CID)
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for in‐
stance "System settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"System settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display.
▷
Press button.
The previous display opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
New display is opened.
The arrow indicates that additional displays can
be opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press button twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Save
station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the Controller.
Seite 23
Central Information Display (CID)
AT A GLANCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered via the
Controller.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Input
1.
Turn the Controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. : confirm entry.
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete let‐
ters or number.
or
Hold the Controller down: delete
all letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available on
the Control Display.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which there is an entry are dis‐
played at the left edge.
1.
Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are
displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played.
Operating via touch‐
screen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use any
objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on symbol.
Seite 24
AT A GLANCE
Central Information Display (CID)
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
All Central Information Display (CID) functions
can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for in‐
stance "System settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
The arrow indicates that additional displays can
be opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap on symbol.
New display is opened.
Opening recently used menus
1. Tap on symbol.
2. Tap on symbol.
Changing settings
Settings such as volumes can be changed via
the touchscreen.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or left,
until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on symbol.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Seite 25
Central Information Display (CID)
AT A GLANCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the letter
or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol for
an extended period: delete all letters
or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved with the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Touchpad
General information
Some functions of the Central Information Dis‐
play (CID) can be operated using the touchpad
on the Controller:
Selecting functions
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Map": using the map.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without se‐
lecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to
change between upper and lower-case let‐
ters, numbers and characters, refer to
page 24.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the Con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Seite 26
AT A GLANCE
Central Information Display (CID)
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, for instance infor‐
mation from the Onboard Computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus, where
the split screen is supported.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols.
Status field symbols
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Cellular network is not available.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are loaded.
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
Music collection.
AUX-IN port.
Bluetooth audio.
Seite 27
Central Information Display (CID)
AT A GLANCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Symbol Meaning
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
iPod.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been switched
off.
Encrypted connection not active.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The Central Information Display (CID) functions
can be stored on the programmable memory
buttons and called up directly, for instance
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Storing a function
1.
Select the function via the Central Informa‐
tion Display (CID).
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This
means, for instance that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 28
AT A GLANCE
Central Information Display (CID)
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control Display
can be operated by voice commands via the
voice activation system. The system supports
you with announcements during input.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary can only be operated
via the voice activation system to a limited
extent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
instructions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
Functional requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
To set the language, refer to page 32.
Using the voice activa‐
tion system
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function via the Central Information Display
(CID).
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken.
You may select list entries such as phone list
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
Seite 29
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display:
▷ Some possible commands for the current
menu.
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
▷ Encrypted connection is not available.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have information on the operating prin‐
ciple of the voice activation system read
out loud: ›General information on voice
control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Example: opening the
tone settings
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output,
if needed.
2.
Press button on the steering wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Settings
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog
or a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Selecting the input language
For some languages, the input language can be
selected.
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Voice control:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activating voice recognition via the
server
The voice recognition feature via the server
provides a dictation function and a natural
method of entering destinations while improv‐
ing the quality of voice recognition. To use the
functions, data is transmitted to a service pro‐
vider via an encrypted connection and stored
locally there.
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably
interrupted, for instance due to background
noise or talking.
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
Seite 30
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Information on Emer‐
gency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a phone connection.
Environmental condi‐
tions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 31
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
General settings
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Language
Setting the language
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐
fer to page 30.
Time
Setting the time zone
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time format
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 32
AT A GLANCE
General settings
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Date
Setting the date
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the date format
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the units of
measurement
You can set the units of measurement for some
values, for example, fuel consumption, distan‐
ces and temperature.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti‐
vated or deactivated.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Control Display
Brightness
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Seite 33
General settings
AT A GLANCE
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Screensaver
If no entries are made via the Central Informa‐
tion Display (CID), a screensaver can be dis‐
played after an adjustable time.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
ing in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐
tus field.
Retrieving messages
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
message is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control messages,
can be deleted from the list. Check Control
messages are displayed as long as they are rel‐
evant.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
3.
Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Settings
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or pri‐
ority.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers various functions which re‐
quire data to be transferred to MINI or a service
provider. The data transfer can be deactivated
for some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Seite 34
AT A GLANCE
General settings
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Activating/deactivating the data
transfer
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "My MINI"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently deleted
via the Central Information Display (CID).
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing data is deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina‐
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "My MINI"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "Delete personal data"
7. "OK"
8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐
pleted.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the
deletion.
Canceling deletion
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for using
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection
type to select depends on the mobile device
and the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible func‐
tions and the suitable connection types for
them. The scope of functions depends on the
mobile device.
Seite 35
General settings
AT A GLANCE
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Function Connection
type
Making calls via the hands-free
system.
Using phone functions via the
Central Information Display
(CID).
Using the smartphone Office
functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smart‐
phone or the audio player.
Bluetooth or
USB.
Using compatible apps via the
Central Information Display
(CID).
Bluetooth or
USB.
USB storage device:
Exporting and importing driver
profiles.
Performing software updates.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the smart‐
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
USB.
Using Apple CarPlay apps via
the Central Information Display
(CID) and voice operation.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ Apple CarPlay
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information sys‐
tems and communication devices while driving
can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only use the systems or devices when the
traffic situation allows. If necessary, stop and
use the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.◀
Compatible devices
General information
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.miniusa.com/
bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 41, can be
performed, if needed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 36, with
Bluetooth interface.
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in
the vehicle, refer to page 37.
▷ Bluetooth pre-settings, such as visibility,
may be required on the device; refer to the
owner's manual of the device.
Seite 36
AT A GLANCE
General settings
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Switching on Bluetooth
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be acti‐
vated prior to pairing.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Office"
Activate function to transmit short mes‐
sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes,
and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can
be incurred by transmitting all data to
the vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact
pictures.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the device
will be used:
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Apps"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity
of the mobile device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the de‐
vice and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via the Cen‐
tral Information Display (CID).
The device is connected and displayed in
the device list.
If connection was not successful: Frequently
Asked Questions, refer to page 37.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec‐
tions with other devices.
Seite 37
General settings
AT A GLANCE
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
and start a new device search.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Possibly too high or too low ambient tem‐
peratures for mobile phone operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐
treme ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via the
Central Information Display (CID)?
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly
configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio
device.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for
instance due to stored information such as
notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or additional phone
function.
How can the phone connection quality be im‐
proved?
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected
to the USB interface.
▷ Mobile phones.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance
MP3 player.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐
fer to page 63.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 41.
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
Seite 38
AT A GLANCE
General settings
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB storage device cannot be
guaranteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
interface if the device supports this.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device
via the onboard socket, when it is con‐
nected to the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
is being used, settings may be required on
the USB storage device, refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 36, with USB
interface.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suita‐
ble adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 191.
The USB storage device is connected to the ve‐
hicle and displayed in the device list.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and the Central Information Display (CID).
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 36.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to
page 37, via Bluetooth
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list, refer to page 40.
Operation
For more information, see the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, MINI Driv‐
er's Guide app or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, and Communication.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
Seite 39
General settings
AT A GLANCE
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is established,
CarPlay can no longer be selected.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the de‐
vice list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con‐
cerned from the list of stored vehicles un‐
der Bluetooth and under WiFi.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact
the hotline, a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Managing mobile devices
General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically recognized and reconnected
when the ignition is switched on.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
necessary, for instance authorization, see
owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired and/or connected with the
vehicle are displayed in the device list.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device
is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Apple CarPlay"
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐
tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a
device that is already connected and the device
will be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device
The connection of the device to the vehicle is
disconnected.
The device remains paired and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 40.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Seite 40
AT A GLANCE
General settings
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the device
before disconnecting are assigned to the de‐
vice when it is reconnected. If the device is al‐
ready connected, these functions are deacti‐
vated.
Deleting the device
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Swapping the telephone and additional
phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐
hicle, the functions of the phone and additional
phone can be switched.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3
players. Software updates are available for
many of the supported devices. The vehicle is
maintained up-to-date via regular vehicle soft‐
ware updates.
Updates and related current information is
available on the Internet at www.mini.com/
update.
Displaying the installed software
version
The software version installed in the vehicle is
displayed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional infor‐
mation.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB data storage to a USB in‐
terface.
3. "My MINI"
4. "System settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.
Seite 41
General settings
AT A GLANCE
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Restoring the software version
The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first software
update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the
vehicle is stationary.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is re‐
stored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
Seite 42
AT A GLANCE
General settings
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
You can use various media formats to call up
the content in the Owner's Manual. The follow‐
ing Owner's Manual media formats are availa‐
ble:
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 43.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle,
refer to page 43.
▷ MINI Motorer’s Guide App, refer to
page 44.
▷ Online Owner's Manual, refer to page 45.
There are different features, refer to page 46,
in each of the different media formats.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all
standard, country-specific, and optional fea‐
tures offered with the series.
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the instructions of the Supplemen‐
tary Owner's Manuals, which are included in
addition to the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1. Press button.
2. "My MINI"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the required method of accessing the
contents.
Scrolling through the owner's manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Context help
General information
The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
the function that is currently selected can be
displayed directly.
Seite 43
Owner's Manual media
AT A GLANCE
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Opening via Central Information
Display (CID)
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
1.
Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via the Cen‐
tral Information Display (CID):
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Executing
Press button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
MINI Motorer’s Guide app
Concept
The app specifically describes features and
functions found in the vehicle.
The app can be displayed on smartphones and
tablets.
General information
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app for iOS or Android in the respec‐
tive Store.
Entering the vehicle identification number fil‐
ters the contents.
Vehicles
It is possible to store Owner's Manuals for vari‐
ous vehicles in the app.
It is also possible to test the app using a dem‐
onstration vehicle.
Operating systems and language
The app is available for the iOS and Android op‐
erating systems.
Seite 44
AT A GLANCE
Owner's Manual media
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The Owner's Manual is downloaded in the lan‐
guage of the device.
Online Owner's Manual
Concept
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle.
The Online Owner's Manual can be displayed in
any of today's browsers.
General information
The Online Owner's Manual is available in
many countries. An account on the customer
portal may be required.
Entering the vehicle identification number fil‐
ters the contents.
Vehicles
It is possible to store several individual Owner's
Manuals for various vehicles.
Language
The language is based on whichever language
is set in the operating system.
Printing
You can use the print function for automatically
formatting and printing out individual chapters.
Media components
General information
The following components are not available to
the same extent in all media formats.
Additional information on availability, refer to
page 46.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use
basic vehicle functions and what to do in case
of a breakdown.
Search by illustrations
Based on illustrations, image search provides
information and descriptions. This is helpful
when the terminology for a feature is not at
hand.
Frequently asked questions
This chapter provides answers to frequently
asked questions about your vehicle and helpful
links to additional information.
Quick links
The chapter on quick links explains the most
important information and operating instruc‐
tions on the basis of various situations.
Videos
The videos explain the main functions of the
systems.
Smart Scan
You can use Smart Scan to scan various sym‐
bols in the vehicle. After a brief explanation of
the symbol in question appears, it is then possi‐
ble to display the chapter directly.
Smart Scan is only available for the iOS operat‐
ing system.
Keyword search
You can use keywords to search for information
and descriptions in the media.
Seite 45
Owner's Manual media
AT A GLANCE
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Key features
Printed Integrated APP Online
All equipment included. X — — —
Equipment included in vehicle. — X X X
Quick Reference Guide. — X X X
Search by illustrations. — X X X
Frequently asked questions. — — X X
Quick links. — — X X
Videos. — X X X
Smart Scan. — — X —
Keyword search. X X X X
X: included.
—: not included.
Seite 46
AT A GLANCE
Owner's Manual media
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
MINI eDRIVE
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Hybrid system
Concept
This MINI is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to the
combustion engine, the vehicle features a high-
voltage system that consists of an electric mo‐
tor and a high-voltage battery among other
things.
The hybrid system can move the vehicle purely
electrically. It can also support the combustion
engine in certain situations.
General information
The vehicle does not consume any fuel while
driving purely electrically. This enables environ‐
mentally friendly driving without emissions in
inner-city traffic. If the combustion engine is
used, the hybrid system support reduces fuel
consumption even further.
In addition to this, the electric motor acts as an
alternator: during braking and coasting, it con‐
verts the vehicle's kinetic energy into electrical
energy. The electrical energy is stored in the
high-voltage battery and is used to drive the
electric motor.
The vehicle can be charged, refer to page 218,
via the charging socket at charging stations or
household sockets.
Overview
1 Combustion engine
2 Control-system electronics, electric motor
3 Electric motor
4 High-voltage cables: orange
5 High-voltage battery
6 Charging socket
7 Vehicle battery
Functions while driving
Electric driving: ePOWER.
Under certain conditions, refer to page 93,
the vehicle is powered only by the electric mo‐
tor.
Variable drive type
The combustion engine drives the front axle
and the electric motor the rear axle. Depending
on the operating condition, the vehicle has the
options of front-wheel drive, rear-wheel drive
or bundled for four-wheel drive.
Follow the information about electric driving
ePOWER, driving with the combustion engine
POWER, and the driving stability control sys‐
tems.
Seite 47
MINI eDRIVE
AT A GLANCE
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Assistance from the electric motor
Driving off and accelerating require a lot of en‐
ergy.
To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuel
consumption, the electric motor boosts the
combustion engine, refer to page 95. To do
this, the electric motor uses the energy saved in
the high-voltage battery.
Driving with the combustion engine:
POWER
The combustion engine, refer to page 94,
provides the main drive power to move the ve‐
hicle. If necessary, the high-voltage battery is
charged at the same time.
The hybrid system always starts the combus‐
tion engine automatically.
Auto Start/Stop function, coasting
The Auto Start/Stop function, refer to
page 92, switches the combustion engine off
while the vehicle is moving, when braking,
when rolling to a halt, and while the vehicle is
stopped. The condition of rolling with the com‐
bustion engine switched off is referred to as
coasting. Convenience functions such as the
automatic climate control are supplied by the
high-voltage battery and can remain switched
on.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
The high-voltage battery of the hybrid system is
charged through energy recovery while driving.
The electric motor acts as a generator and con‐
verts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into elec‐
trical energy, refer to page 95.
Charging the vehicle
The high-voltage battery of the vehicle can be
charged, refer to page 218, via the charging
socket at charging stations or household sock‐
ets.
Regular and complete charging of the high-
voltage battery reduces the fuel consumption
by using electric energy.
Climate control while parking and
charging
The hybrid system makes it possible to operate
the automatic climate control prior to driving
off and with the combustion engine switched
off.
During vehicle charging or if the high-voltage
battery is sufficiently charged, the car's interior
can be can be cooled or heated in advance of
the trip, refer to page 224.
The stationary climate control can also be
switched on directly.
Display
The displays of the hybrid system provide infor‐
mation about the current state of hybrid opera‐
tion.
Energy-saving driving
To save energy while driving, read the following
descriptions:
▷ Saving fuel, refer to page 211.
▷ Using the hybrid system efficiently, refer to
page 212.
▷ GREEN Mode.
▷ Adapting to the course of the road.
Safety of the hybrid system
Follow the information on safety, refer to
page 49.
Long-term vehicle storage
Observe the information on vehicle storage and
for longer idle periods, refer to page 275.
Seite 48
AT A GLANCE
MINI eDRIVE
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Safety of the hybrid system
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Working on the hybrid
system
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that no changes be made to the vehicle, for in‐
stance the retrofitting of accessories, that will
have an effect on the vehicle’s hybrid system.
Safety information
DANGER
Improperly executed work, in particular
maintenance and repair on the high-voltage
system, can lead to electric shock. There is a
risk of injury, fire and danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that the work on the vehicle, in particular main‐
tenance and repair, be performed by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
Hybrid system
Contact with water
The hybrid system is typically safe even in the
following example situations:
▷ Water in the footwell, for instance after a
rainstorm when sunroof was kept open.
▷ Vehicle is in water but only up to the al‐
lowed height.
▷ Fluid escapes in the cargo area.
Automatic deactivation
If an accident occurs, the hybrid system is
switched off automatically to prevent risk of
danger to occupants and other road users.
Read the information on What to do after an
accident, refer to page 270.
Seite 49
Safety of the hybrid system
AT A GLANCE
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
HANDLE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable
battery. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 54.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 65.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Driver profile, refer to
page 63.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the remote
control, refer to page 255.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
can be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
Seite 52
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
With automatic tailgate operation: open the
tailgate
4 Panic mode
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 65,
the following access points are unlocked.
▷ Driver's door.
Press the button of the remote control
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points.
▷ All doors and tailgate.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐
fer to page 63, are applied.
▷ The driver's seat is set to the last position
saved in the driver's profile. This function
must be activated in the settings, refer to
page 65.
▷ The interior lights, courtesy lights and the
MINI logo projection are switched on.
These functions are not available if the inte‐
rior lights were switched off manually.
▷ The welcome lights are switched on, if this
function was activated.
▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient
closing are folded open.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 67, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote con‐
trol.
All doors and the tailgate are locked.
The alarm system, refer to page 67, is
switched on.
3.
Press and hold this button on the
remote control in the area close to the ve‐
hicle after locking.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must
be switched off by means of the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
With Comfort Access: convenient
closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Closing
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control in the area close to the
vehicle.
The windows and the glass sunroof are closed,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Seite 53
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Switch on interior lights and courtesy
light
Press button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
The MINI logo projection is also switched on.
These functions are not available if the interior
lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing
the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 65.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening
Press and hold button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
Without automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
With automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate opens automatically.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery
1.
Remove the integrated key from the re‐
mote control, refer to page 56.
2. Slide the integrated key into the opening
and raise the cover.
The battery compartment is accessible.
Seite 54
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the
battery compartment and raise the cover.
4. Push battery in the direction of the arrow
using a pointed object and lift it out.
5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
6. Insert lid and cover.
7. Push the integrated key into the remote
control until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop or
take them to a collection point.
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 54.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
stance charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a differ‐
ent location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 56.
Seite 55
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Switching on the drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the remote
control
It is not possible to start the engine if the re‐
mote control has not been detected.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the remote control has not been de‐
tected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the remote control as shown against
the marked area on the steering column.
Pay attention to the display in the instru‐
ment cluster.
2. If the remote control is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated
key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage
to property. Remove the integrated key before
pulling the outside door handle.◀
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
1.
Remove lid on the door lock.
To do this, slide the integrated key into the
opening from below and remove the lid.
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
Seite 56
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock. In order to stop this alarm, un‐
lock vehicle with the remote control or switch
on the ignition, if needed, through emergency
detection of the remote control, refer to
page 55.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking
Press button.
Opening
▷
Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors re‐
main locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
on the door to be opened; the first time un‐
locks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Open the tailgate.
▷ Opening/closing the tailgate with no-touch
activation.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
Seite 57
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer door
handle, press the button.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 65,
only the driver's door may be unlocked. Unlike
when unlocking with the remote control, press‐
ing the button on the outer door handle again
does not unlock the other vehicle access points.
Rather, the vehicle is locked again.
If a door of a locked vehicle was opened from
the inside via the door opener, pressing the
button on the outer door handle first locks the
vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the
outer door handle must be pressed again.
This is the case whether the vehicle was locked
automatically after driving off or via the central
locking system button from the inside.
Locking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer door
handle, press the button.
Convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Closing
Press and hold down the button on the driver's
or front passenger's outer door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof will be closed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Opening the tailgate
General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 58
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening
Press button next on tailgate.
Without automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
With automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate opens automatically.
Opening and closing the split doors
with no-touch activation
Concept
The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
touch activation using the remote control you
are carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-di‐
rected foot motion in the center of the area at
the rear of the vehicle and the tailgate is
opened or closed.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently
by an unconscious or alleged recognized foot
movement.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activa‐
tion, locked doors are not unlocked.
Safety information
WARNING
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts
may be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas
system. There is a risk of injury. When moving
your foot, make sure you have a firm stance
and do not touch the vehicle.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Performing the foot movement
1.
Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
about an arm's length away from the rear
of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direc‐
tion of travel and immediately pull it back.
Seite 59
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
With this movement, the leg must pass
through the ranges of both sensors.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Before the opening, the hazard warning system
flashes.
Moving your foot again will stop the opening
motion, and moving it one more time after that
will close the tailgate.
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Before closing, the hazard warning system
flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.
Moving your foot again will stop the closing
motion, and moving it one more time after that
will re-open the tailgate.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 54.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock‐
ing request recognition function on the door
handles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 56.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 65.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
Seite 60
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Without automatic tailgate operation
Opening from the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press button next on tailgate.
▷ Press and hold button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re‐
mote control, refer to page 54.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Opening from the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the storage compartment of the driv‐
er's door upward.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, pull the
button in the storage compartment of the driv‐
er's door upward twice in quick succession.
Closing
Recessed grips on the interior trim of the tail‐
gate can be used to conveniently pull down the
tailgate.
With automatic tailgate operation
Opening
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
When adjusting the opening height, ensure that
there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above
the tailgate.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
opening height.
From the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
Seite 61
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
▷ Press and hold button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
From the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
Pull button in the storage compartment
of the driver's door upward.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, pull the but‐
ton in the storage compartment of the driver's
door upward twice in quick succession.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
Interruption of the opening procedure
The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tail‐
gate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the remote con‐
trol. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the
storage compartment of the driver's door.
Pulling again continues the opening mo‐
tion.
Closing
From the outside
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
From the inside
Press and hold the button in the storage
compartment of the driver's door.
The remote control must be located in the car's
interior for this function.
An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is
closed.
From inside the tailgate
Without Comfort Access:
Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
tailgate.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the remote control
Seite 62
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the tailgate.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky move‐
ment.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tail‐
gate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
▷ By releasing the button in the storage com‐
partment of the driver's door. Pressing
again and holding continues the closing
motion.
Malfunction
Safety information
WARNING
With manual operation of a blocked tail‐
gate, it can release itself unexpectedly from the
blockage. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not operate the tail‐
gate manually if it is blocked. Have it checked
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Manual operation
Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a
slow and smooth motion.
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only. Closing occurs automatically.
Driver profile
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev‐
eral drivers can be stored and called up again
when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
activated. All settings stored in the driver profile
are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐
ing unlocking. These settings are also restored,
if the vehicle has been used in the meantime
by a person with a different remote control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
stored in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via the Cen‐
tral Information Display (CID), the settings
stored in it will be applied automatically. The
new driver profile is assigned to the remote
control currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control: it
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allocated
to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐
mote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
Seite 63
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Settings
The settings for the following systems and func‐
tions are stored in the active profile. The scope
of storable settings depends on country and
equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Navigation.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ MINI Driving Modes.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐
tion.
Both the positions saved via the seat mem‐
ory and the last position set are saved.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
ferent driver profile may be activated. This al‐
lows you to call up personal vehicle settings,
even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your
own remote control.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver
profile are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to
the remote control being used at the time.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a
different remote control, this driver profile
will apply to both remote controls.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are stored in none of the three personal driver
profiles.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
driver profiles.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the driver profile currently in use
are reset to their factory settings.
Seite 64
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before delivering
the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver
profiles can be taken into another vehicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
Importing driver profiles
Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be
imported via the USB interface.
The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the im‐
ported driver profile.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
5. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Displaying driver profiles during start
The driver profiles can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote control
and driver may not be possible in the following
cases, for example.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his
or her own remote control, but another
person is driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls
with him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐
side of the vehicle.
Settings
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, various settings for open‐
ing and closing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 63, currently used.
Seite 65
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Unlocking
Doors
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door is unlocked.
Pressing again unlocks the entire vehi‐
cle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
Depending on your vehicle's optional
features, the tailgate is either unlocked
or opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
Depending on your vehicle's optional
features, the tailgate is either unlocked
or opened and the doors unlocked.
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the driver
profile marked with this symbol.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
tions.
The most recent position is independent of the
positions saved via the seat memory.
Automatic locking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Automatic unlocking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After the engine is switched off by pressing
the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is
automatically unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Seite 66
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood
or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Di‐
agnosis.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
Depending on local regulations, the acous‐
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Overview
Indicator light in the roof fin.
Indicator light on the interior mirror.
Switching on/off
When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Access,
the alarm system is switched off and on at the
same time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 68.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
Seite 67
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Signals of the indicator lights
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ At the gas station: if the vehicle is locked af‐
ter refueling starts.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi‐
cle is locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
or switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 55.
▷ With Comfort Access: If you have the re‐
mote control with you, unlock the vehicle
using the button on the driver's side or pas‐
senger side door.
Seite 68
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Power windows
General information
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
windows are automatically closed except a
gap.
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Overview
Power windows
Safety switch
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is being
held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 53.
Closing
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is being
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the
motion.
Convenient closing via the remote control, refer
to page 53.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 58.
Jam protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a
window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
Seite 69
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The window closes with limited jam protec‐
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Safety switch
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for instance from
opening and closing the rear windows using
the switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Malfunction
General information
In certain situations a window can only be op‐
erated to a limited extent.
▷ After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the a window can only be
operated to a limited extent. The system
must be initialized in this case.
▷ The power window motors are equipped
with overheating protection. If a window is
opened and closed several times within a
short period of time, the overheating pro‐
tection switches the motor off temporarily.
Depending on the degree of overheating, it
may only be possible to close the window
or it may not be possible to operate it at all.
In this case: allow the power window motor
to cool down.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During initialization, the affected window
closes without jam protection.
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
1. Open the affected window completely.
2.
Pull the switch to the resistance point
and hold.
The window closes.
3.
Continue holding the switch pulled to
the resistance point.
The window opens and closes once or twice
after approx. 15 seconds, depending on the
vehicle's equipment.
4. Release switch.
Panoramic glass sun‐
roof
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the glass sun‐
roof is automatically closed.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Seite 70
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Overview
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the switch up to or
beyond the resistance point and
release it.
The glass sunroof is raised.
Opening glass sunroof
When the glass sunroof is closed
Press the switch back beyond
the resistance point and release
it twice.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops
the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
▷ Slide switch back to the re‐
sistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is opened
as long as the switch is
pressed.
▷ Press the switch back beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
fully open. In these models, the automatic
function initially only opens the glass sunroof
up to this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
roof fully.
Closing glass sunroof
With the glass sunroof open
▷ Slide switch forward to the
resistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is closed as
long as the switch is pressed
and stops in the raised posi‐
tion.
▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the
raised position.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it twice.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
Press the switch forward beyond
the resistance point and release
it.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Jam protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
glass sunroof closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
Seite 71
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing without the jam protection
system
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the re‐
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power interruption
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent. The system must
be initialized in this case. MINI recommends
having this work performed only by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Settings
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Follow the in‐
formation in the following chapters:
▷ Seats, refer to page 73.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 76.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 78.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 136.
Front seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts can no longer be ensured. There is a risk
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest so that it is in the most upright posi‐
tion as possible and do not adjust again while
driving.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt
Seite 73
Settings
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly making sure it engages prop‐
erly.
Height
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed to reach the desired height.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine
are supported for upright posture.
Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease
the curvature.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the function, refer
to page 66, is activated for this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 80.
Overview
1 Memory function
2 Lumbar support
3 Backrest tilt
4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Settings
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine
are supported for upright posture.
Settings
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Seite 75
Settings
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to
page 213, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Rear seats
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when folding
down the center armrest in the rear. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the center armrest is clear during fold‐
ing down.◀
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to unintentional
unlocking of the rear backrests by the straps.
There is a risk of injury. Do not fasten any ob‐
jects to the straps for unlocking the rear back‐
rests.◀
Backrest tilt
Pull the strap and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety belt
buckles
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
seat are intended for the persons sitting on the
left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
If needed, disengage the safety belt in the rear
from the belt buckle on the side.
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Settings
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every
build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than
one person will potentially defeat the ability of
the safety belt to serve its protective func‐
tion.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Do not allow more than one person to wear a
single safety belt. Infants and children are not
allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be
transported and secured in designated child re‐
straint systems.◀
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that all occupants are wearing safety belts cor‐
rectly.◀
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in
the following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean.
Have the safety belts checked after an accident
at the dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1.
Slowly guide the safety belt out of the
holder when fastening it.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Seite 77
Settings
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Middle safety belt in the rear
Buckling the safety belt
1. Pull the buckle tongues out of the mounts
in the roof.
2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt
buckle, arrow 1.
3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the belt
buckle, arrow 2.
Safety belt buckles must audibly click into
place.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to open
the second safety belt buckle, arrow 2.
4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the
roofliner.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a signal
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
reminder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. Adjust the distance via the back‐
rest tilt as needed.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Settings
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pil‐
lows, while driving.◀
Adjusting the height: John Cooper
Works sport seat
The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐
justed.
Adjusting the height
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, move the head re‐
straint up or down slightly, making sure it en‐
gages properly.
Removing: John Cooper Works sport
seat
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Fold the seat backrest forward if needed.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. Adjust the distance via the back‐
rest tilt as needed.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
Seite 79
Settings
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pil‐
lows, while driving.◀
Adjusting the height
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, move the head re‐
straint up or down slightly, making sure it en‐
gages properly.
Fold down
▷ To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to
page 198, in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resist‐
ance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func‐
tion:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
General information
Different settings can be assigned to two mem‐
ory locations.
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Settings
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The adjustment of the lumbar support is not
stored.
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the seat.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
an accident. Only retrieve the memory function
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
Overview
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button. The LED in the button
lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile
currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked
via the remote control, the position is automat‐
ically retrieved if the function, refer to page 66,
is activated for this purpose.
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 80.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of
an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Seite 81
Settings
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Overview
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The mirror movement follows the but‐
ton movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
glass.
Folding in and out
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap‐
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the
following situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's inte‐
rior mirror, refer to page 83, are used to con‐
trol this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side
mirror position.
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Settings
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
mirror, flip the lever forward.
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Settings
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Seite 83
Settings
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Always transport children in the rear
seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear
seat in suitable child restraint systems designed
for the age, weight and size of the child. Chil‐
dren 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight, and size.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
tems. The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure chil‐
dren shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
child restraint systems.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of
front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
page 138.
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
Installing child re‐
straint systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
WARNING
The protective effect of damaged child
restraint systems or of child restraint systems
exposed to an accident and their fastening sys‐
tems can be limited or lost. A child can e.g.,not
sufficiently restrained, for instance in the event
of an accident or braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Have damaged child restraint systems or of
child restraint systems exposed to an accident
and their fastening systems checked and possi‐
bly replaced by the dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
tomatically, refer to page 138.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possible
and adjust its height to the highest and thus
best possible position for the belt and to offer
optimal protection in the event of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the front passenger seat carefully for‐
Seite 85
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
ward until the best possible belt guide position
is reached.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten
child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
In some cases it may be necessary to separate
the lower belt attachment. Safety belts, refer to
page 76.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐
straint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems
are not correctly engaged, the protective effect
of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can
be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.◀
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the
lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
chors are marked with a pair,
2, of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH posi‐
tions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat. Use
the vehicle safety belt instead
for the middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint systems with tether strap
Safety information
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
WARNING
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or there is none. In particular situations, for
instance braking maneuvers or in case of an ac‐
cident, the rear backrest can fold forward.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the rear backrests are locked.◀
NOTE
The anchors for the upper retaining straps
of child restraint systems are only provided for
these retaining straps. When other objects are
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount
child restraint systems to the upper retaining
straps.◀
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats
with an upper top tether are marked
with this symbol. It can be found on the rear
seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the anchor
1.
Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retaining
strap between the supports of the head re‐
straint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor on the rear seat.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
Seite 87
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Locking the doors and
windows
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer
to page 70.
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Driving
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Start/Stop button, drive-
ready state
Concept
The following ready states can
be attained by pressing the Start/
Stop button:
▷ Radio-ready state on/off.
▷ Ignition on/off.
▷ Activating/deactivating drive-ready state.
To activate drive-ready state, press the brake
pedal.
The drive-ready state cannot be activated as
long as the charging cable, refer to page 219,
is connected.
Switching radio-ready state on/off
The radio-ready state is activated by pressing
the Start/Stop button in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ When the engine is running.
▷ When drive-ready state is activated.
▷ When the engine is switched off automati‐
cally using the Auto Start/Stop function.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐
main ready for operation.
Radio-ready state is switched off automatically:
▷ If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with
drive-ready state switched off manually.
▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with
the Start/Stop button.
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically switches
to the radio-ready state if the lights are
switched off or, if correspondingly equipped,
the daytime running lights are switched on.
Ignition on
Press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on
the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐
strument cluster light up for a varied length of
time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
Press the Start/Stop button again without step‐
ping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Seite 89
Driving
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Safety measures
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. This function is only available when
the low beams are switched off.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
▷ When the front doors are opened if there is
no other person sitting in the front seats.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
approx. 10 minutes of no use.
When the ignition is switched off automatically
by opening or closing the driver's door, un‐
buckling the driver's safety belt or by the auto‐
matic switching of the low beams to parking
lights, the radio-ready state remains active.
Drive-ready state
When drive-ready state is activated, the vehicle
is operational. Activated drive-ready state is the
equivalent of a running engine in conventional
vehicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is equiv‐
alent to switching the ignition off.
Drive-ready state in de‐
tail
Concept
The following are the different drive-ready
state variants:
▷ Electric drive-ready state, refer to
page 91.
The vehicle is powered by the electric mo‐
tor.
▷ Starting the combustion engine, refer to
page 91.
The vehicle is powered by the combustion
engine.
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accu‐
mulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger
to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure
sufficient ventilation.◀
WARNING
When driving in electric mode, pedes‐
trians and other traffic might pay less attention
to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Driving
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Activating drive-ready state
1.
Close the driver's door.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Depending on the prerequisite, the electric
drive-ready state is possible or the engine can
be started.
Electric drive-ready state
General information
The vehicle is ready for driving without starting
the combustion engine.
Functional requirement
The electric drive-ready state is possible, if the
prerequisites for electric driving, refer to
page 93, are fulfilled.
Display
READY indicates drive-ready
state.
Combustion engine start
Functional requirements
The combustion engine is started with activa‐
tion of the drive-ready state, refer to page 91,
under the following conditions:
▷ The temperature of the hybrid system is too
high or too low.
▷ The high-voltage battery has an insufficient
charge.
Driving away
1.
Activate drive-ready state.
2. Engage selector lever position D, M/S or R.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Drive away.
Deactivating drive-ready state
After stopping the vehicle:
1.
Set the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
After parking the vehicle, you may hear noises
due to operation of the hybrid system, such as
for cooling of the high-voltage battery.
Safety measure
The drive-ready state is deactivated automati‐
cally after approx. 10 minutes when the vehicle
is stationary if, with the selector lever in posi‐
tion P or N, the driver's door has been opened
and neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator
pedal have been depressed.
Before driving into a vehicle wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a vehicle wash,
follow instructions for going into an automatic
vehicle wash, refer to page 272.
Seite 91
Driving
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the combustion engine
when conditions for electric driving have been
met. The ignition or drive-ready state remains
switched on.
General information
READY is displayed in the instrument cluster. If
necessary, the combustion engine starts auto‐
matically.
The combustion engine is also stopped during
the trip when rolling without acceleration or
braking. This driving condition, in which the ve‐
hicle is traveling without power and energy re‐
covery is not active, is referred to as coasting,
refer to page 94.
The combustion engine is not switched off au‐
tomatically in the following situations:
▷ The combustion engine is not at operating
temperature.
▷ The transmission selector lever is in position
M/S.
▷ High-voltage battery is heavily discharged
or vehicle electrical system is heavily bur‐
dened.
▷ High stress of the automatic climate control
in the heating or cooling phase.
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is being optimized for the cur‐
rent driving style, for instance during the
break-in period or after a service appoint‐
ment.
▷ The hybrid system is malfunctioning.
Safety mode
An automatically stopped combustion engine
does not start independently:
▷ When the driver's door is open and neither
the brake nor accelerator pedal are de‐
pressed.
▷ When the hood is unlocked.
The indicator lights come on. The combustion
engine can only be started via the Start/Stop
button.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, for instance
when leaving it.
1.
Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ The ignition is switched off.
▷ The radio-ready state is activated.
▷ The Auto Start/Stop function is deacti‐
vated.
▷ Engage selector lever position P.
2. Set the parking brake.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the combustion engine automatically in the
event of a malfunction. A message is displayed.
It is possible to continue driving. Have the sys‐
tem checked.
Electric driving: ePOWER.
General information
In ePOWER, the vehicle is driven exclusively
electrically. ePOWER works automatically.
Depending on the charge state of the high-
voltage battery, maximum speed and range
achieved can vary.
For electrical driving, certain conditions, refer to
page 93, must be satisfied.
Displays of the hybrid system, refer to
page 111.
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Driving
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
When driving in electric mode, pedes‐
trians and other traffic might pay less attention
to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
Functional requirements
▷ State of charge and temperature of the
high-voltage battery is sufficient.
▷ Selector lever position D or R engaged.
▷ The accelerator pedal is only slightly de‐
pressed.
▷ The possible maximum speed for electric
driving is not exceeded.
▷ The driver's door is closed.
▷ MID or GREEN driving mode is selected.
eDRIVE button
General information
Using the eDRIVE button, the characteristics of
the hybrid system can be adjusted.
▷ MAX eDrive, refer to page 93
▷ Auto eDRIVE, refer to page 93
▷ SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 94
To switch between the individual function
modes, press the eDRIVE button up or down.
Overview
eDRIVE button
Auto eDRIVE
General information
Auto eDRIVE is activated by default when the
vehicle is started via the Start/Stop button.
In Auto eDRIVE, the vehicle is driven in hybrid
mode corresponding to the various driving sit‐
uations, i.e. the drive combines combustion en‐
gine and electric motor. The respectively most
effective drive type is preferred.
MAX eDRIVE
General information
The vehicle is driven exclusively
electrically.
If necessary, the maximum electrical speed that
applies to MAX eDRIVE may be deliberately ex‐
ceeded with the aid of kickdown, refer to
page 107. The combustion engine is automati‐
cally started and the system switches to AUTO
eDRIVE mode. Automatic starting of the engine
while driving, refer to page 94.
Activating MAX eDRIVE
Press the button up repeatedly, until
MAX eDRIVE is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
When pressing the button, the current eDRIVE
setting is graphically displayed on the Control
Display.
Seite 93
Driving
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
SAVE BATTERY
General information
The current charge state of the
high-voltage battery can be
maintained or increased with
SAVE BATTERY. The electric
range can be conserved in this
way for a later point in the trip, for instance.
This charging process increases the average
fuel consumption.
The acceleration boost by the electric motor
may be restricted.
The function is only available if sufficient fuel is
available and in selector lever position D.
Activating SAVE BATTERY
Press the button down repeatedly, un‐
til SAVE with the battery symbol is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
When pressing the button, the current eDRIVE
setting is graphically displayed on the Control
Display.
Auto Start/Stop function, coasting
Concept
The combustion engine is automatically stop‐
ped and disengaged from the drivetrain. This
driving condition of rolling is referred to as
coasting.
Functional requirements
Coasting is possible:
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
▷ Transmission position D is engaged.
▷ The drive system is at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ GREEN Mode: when coasting, without oper‐
ating the brake, at speeds below 100 mph,
approx. 160 km/h.
After coasting, the combustion or electric mo‐
tor restarts depending on the operating state.
Acoustic pedestrian protection
Concept
Depending on the country-specific version, the
system generates a continuous driving noise at
standstill with the drive-ready state activated
and during electric driving up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the
surroundings.
As a result, other traffic participants, for in‐
stance pedestrians or cyclists, can better per‐
ceive the vehicle.
Driving with the combus‐
tion engine: POWER
Concept
The combustion engine provides the main drive
power to move the vehicle. If necessary, the
high-voltage battery is charged at the same
time.
Functional requirements
Automatic starting while driving
The combustion engine is automatically started
under the following conditions while driving:
▷ During intense accelerations or on uphill
grades.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle posi‐
tion, kickdown.
▷ The high-voltage battery has an insufficient
charge.
▷ Selector lever position M/S is engaged.
▷ The speed for electric driving is exceeded
while accelerating.
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Driving
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ Adapting to the course of the road when
destination guidance is activated.
▷ System-related requirement for hybrid
components.
Automatic switching off while driving
When reducing speed, the combustion engine
is switched off when the conditions for electric
driving, refer to page 93, are met.
Assistance from the elec‐
tric motor
Concept
The combustion engine provides the main drive
power to move the vehicle.
The electric motor provides assistance as
needed with additional propulsive power.
eASSIST
During normal vehicle operation, the electric
motor assists the combustion engine, depend‐
ing on the situation. This assistance reduces
fuel consumption.
eBOOST
Accelerating quickly, such as when passing, re‐
quires the maximum available power from the
electric motor. To do this, apply extra force to
the accelerator pedal.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
Concept
The hybrid system makes it possible to convert
kinetic energy into electrical energy during
braking and coasting. This recovered energy
charges the high-voltage battery. If necessary,
this stored electrical energy is output to the
electric motor.
General information
Depending on the setting of the MINI Driving
Modes switch, the high-voltage battery is
charged at different speeds and the vehicle is
decelerated differently while coasting.
Functional requirements
Conditions such as the following must be met
to recover kinetic energy:
▷ The vehicle is moving.
▷ Selector lever position D, M/S is set.
▷ The high-voltage battery is not fully
charged.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Energy recovery displays in the instrument clus‐
ter, refer to page 111.
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
Seite 95
Driving
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
lowing actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Depending on the stopping situation, the park‐
ing brake is engaged automatically.
Steptronic transmission: in some parking situa‐
tions, the parking brake is automatically en‐
gaged, when selector lever position P is en‐
gaged. In these cases, the parking brake is
released automatically when you leave the se‐
lector lever position P.
While driving
To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator light lights up red, a signal
sounds and the brake lights light up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop,
the parking brake is engaged.
Releasing
Releasing manually
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2.
Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is pressed or selec‐
tor lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release in cars with
Steptronic transmission
For automatic release, step on the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator under the
following conditions:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Driving
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
using a wheel chock, for instance when leaving
it.
After a power failure
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1. Switch on the ignition.
2.
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Canada: the lever returns into its starting posi‐
tion after actuation. To switch off manually,
slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Seite 97
Driving
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when
the wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐
tion 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys‐
tem switched on: when travel continues, the
wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Driving
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use the washer system when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty.◀
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Seite 99
Driving
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to
continuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch down‐
ward, arrow 3. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its resting position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch fur‐
ther, arrow 2. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its intermittent position when re‐
leased.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐
der frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when
the wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Folding away the wipers
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Driving
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Canada: wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when
the wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance
point.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Seite 101
Driving
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐
tion is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
cally activated again.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use the washer system when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty.◀
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Driving
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to
continuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch down‐
ward, arrow 3. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its resting position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch fur‐
ther, arrow 2. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its intermittent position when re‐
leased.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐
der frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when
the wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Folding away the wipers
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
Seite 103
Driving
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly
vertical position
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the in‐
structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the win‐
dows can lead to damage to the washing sys‐
tem. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not add silicon-containing additives to the
washer fluid.◀
NOTE
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not mix different windshield washer
concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the informa‐
tion and mixing ratios provided on the contain‐
ers.◀
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Driving
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the
possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
Selector lever version
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a trans‐
mission with either a latching selector lever or a
tap-operated selector lever is installed.
Transmission with a latching selector
lever
The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are
selected by moving the selector lever into the
respective selector lever position. The selector
lever engages in the selector lever positions.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without en‐
gine power in selector lever position N, for in‐
stance in vehicle washes, refer to page 106.
Parking position P
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle.
Seite 105
Driving
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The transmission blocks the drive wheels in se‐
lector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
hicle may begin to move.
Engaging selector lever positions: with
a latching selector lever
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐
lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the
engine is running.
Engaging selector lever position D, N, R,
or P
With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake
pedal before shifting out of selector lever posi‐
tion P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be
deactivated and the shift command will not be
executed.
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever
position P or R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever
position P into another selector lever posi‐
tion.
1. To release the selector lever lock: with the
brake pedal depressed, press the button on
the front of the selector lever.
2. Move the selector lever into the desired po‐
sition.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance
in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N: with
a latching selector lever
1.
Switch on drive-ready state.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage
selector lever position N.
5. Release brake.
The vehicle may roll.
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Driving
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able
to change the selector lever position.
Manually unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 108.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal be‐
yond the resistance point at the full throttle po‐
sition.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐
ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts
up later and the shifting times are shorter.
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start Stop
function are deactivated. Coasting to a stand‐
still and braking phases are used more often to
recover energy. Depending on the driving sit‐
uation, the high-voltage battery is charged at
different speeds. Fuel consumption can in‐
crease.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
Activating manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐
lector lever position D, arrow 1.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear
is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
The Steptronic transmission continues shifting
automatically in certain situations, for instance
when certain engine speed limits are reached.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Seite 107
Driving
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P.
Releasing the transmission lock
manually: with a latching selector lever
If the selector lever is locked in selector lever
position P despite the ignition being switched
on, the brake pedal being depressed and the
button on the selector lever being pressed, the
transmission lock can be unlocked manually:
Before unlocking the transmission lock man‐
ually, set the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling away.
1.
Loosen the selector lever sleeve, together
with the lower retaining ring, from the cen‐
ter console. To do so, pull the retaining ring
upward at the rear edge.
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector,
if needed.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit, refer to page 257, press the
yellow release lever downward, see arrow.
4. Press the button on the front of the selector
lever and move the selector lever back
slightly.
Release the release lever.
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired po‐
sition.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing.
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Driving
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Displays
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Instrument cluster
Overview
1 Displays of the hybrid system 111
2 Indicator/warning lights
3 Speedometer
4 Fuel gauge 117
5 Display/reset miles 117
6 Electronic displays 110
Seite 109
Displays
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Electronic displays
1 Driver assistance systems
Messages, for instance Check Control
Time 117
External temperature 117
Selection lists 121
Total miles/trip odometer 117
Onboard Computer 121
Charging screen 110
2 Selector lever position 105
3 MINI Driving Modes switch status 157
eDRIVE mode status 92
Charging screen
1 Charging status 224
2 Timer, departure time 224
3 End of charging time 224
Departure time with timer 224
4 Stationary climate control 224
Seite 110
CONTROLS
Displays
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Displays of the hybrid
system
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
The following functions of the hybrid system
are displayed:
▷ High-voltage battery charge indicator, refer
to page 111.
▷ Drive-ready state: READY, refer to
page 111.
▷ Electric driving: ePOWER, refer to
page 111.
▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE, refer to
page 111.
▷ Acceleration boost: eBOOST, refer to
page 112.
▷ Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE, refer to
page 112.
▷ SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 112.
The display depends on the system's operating
condition.
High-voltage battery charge indicator
The Onboard Computer in the instrument clus‐
ter can indicate the charge state of the high-
voltage battery.
Drive-ready state: READY
READY indicates drive-ready
state. For further information,
see Drive-ready state in detail,
refer to page 90.
Electric driving: ePOWER.
In ePOWER mode, the range for electric driving
is colored yellow, arrow 1. The range high‐
lighted in yellow can vary depending on the
driving situation and eDRIVE mode.
A pointer indicates the power outputted by the
hybrid drive in a scale, arrow 2.
If the pointer is outside the range highlighted in
yellow, the combustion engine is switched on,
arrow 3.
For further information, refer to Electric driving:
ePOWER.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
Energy recovery during coasting and braking is
indicated as CHARGE in the instrument cluster
depending on the driving mode, see arrow. The
high-voltage battery is charged. If the high-
voltage battery is completely charged, no en‐
ergy can be recovered.
For further information, please refer to Energy
recovery CHARGE, refer to page 95.
Seite 111
Displays
CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Acceleration boost: eBOOST
If the electric motor supports the combustion
engine, for instance during rapid acceleration,
eBOOST, refer to page 95, is displayed. De‐
pending on the available charge state of the
high-voltage battery, there could be more or
less eBOOST available. If the charge state of the
high-voltage battery is low, eBOOST may not
be available.
Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE
The display becomes active after
MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 93, is
activated via the eDRIVE button.
SAVE BATTERY
The display becomes active after
SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 94,
is activated via the eDRIVE but‐
ton.
The high-voltage energy available for electric
driving is conserved for a later point in the trip.
Indications on the Control Display
Current vehicle state
General information
The following are displayed:
▷ Active components of the hybrid system:
Orange: energy flow of the combustion en‐
gine.
Yellow: energy flow of the hybrid system.
▷ Vehicle states:
▷ ePOWER.
▷ POWER.
▷ eBOOST.
▷ CHARGE.
▷ Coasting.
▷ Charging.
▷ System requirements of the hybrid system,
for instance drive system not yet warmed
up to operating temperature.
▷ Driving requirement, for instance transmis‐
sion selector lever in the M/S position.
Displaying the energy flow
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
Adapting to the course of the road
Concept
When the navigation system destination guid‐
ance is active, hybrid operation adapts to spe‐
cific route sections.
Use of the hybrid system is optional.
Situations which are already underway and sit‐
uations ahead are detected, indicated on the
Control Display, and the hybrid drive is adapted
and prepared for them.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available,
for example.
Functional requirements
▷ Selector lever position D engaged.
▷ AUTO eDRIVE hybrid mode is activated.
Seite 112
CONTROLS
Displays
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Displaying the adaptation to the course of
the road
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the function is active.
Display
Example: residential area or area with low
speed restrictions. ePOWER electric driving is
being prepared. When the residential area is
reached, electric driving takes precedence.
Other situations are also shown on the Control
Display:
▷ Downhill gradients: the system is ready to
charge the high-voltage battery.
▷ Target zone: ePOWER electric driving is be‐
ing prepared.
▷ GREEN Mode:
Energy distribution: the electrical energy is
conserved for a later point.
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output
and a SMS text message may appear on the
Control Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
safety belt on the driver or passenger
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Release the parking brake, refer to
page 96.
Seite 113
Displays
CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a colli‐
sion or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too
small.
Increase distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle
approaches another vehicle at a relatively high
differential speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive
maneuver.
Person warning
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving ahead.
Camera-based cruise control, refer to
page 159.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has
been detected ahead of you.
Indicator light flashes: the conditions
are not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be work‐
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
ger braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehi‐
cle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
modify your driving style to the driving circum‐
stances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
DSC, refer to page 155.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated
or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
DSC, refer to page 155, and DTC, refer
to page 156.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 144.
Seite 114
CONTROLS
Displays
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire in‐
flation pressure or a flat tire. Follow the
information in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and then continu‐
ously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure can be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 139.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period
can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con‐
verter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 256.
Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive
Acoustic pedestrian protection deacti‐
vated or possibly not working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 97.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight
control, refer to page 130.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 133.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
uation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 132.
Seite 115
Displays
CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the control
elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 97.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
occur at once, the messages are displayed con‐
secutively.
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Control message and the meaning of the indi‐
cator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Further help
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐
ther help can be selected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the
Integrated Owner's Manual.
Seite 116
CONTROLS
Displays
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "MINI Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Fuel gauge
The arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 227.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Odometer and trip odom‐
eter
Concept
The total number of kilometers driven and the
number of kilometers driven since the last reset
are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Reset the trip odometer
Press the button.
▷ The odometer is displayed
when the ignition is switched
off.
▷ When the ignition is switched
on, the trip odometer is re‐
set.
External temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is a risk
of an accident. Modify your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
Display
The external temperature is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The time can be set via the Cen‐
tral Information Display (CID).
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The date can be set via the Cen‐
tral Information Display (CID).
Seite 117
Displays
CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Range
Concept
The range can be displayed as range for electric
driving or as total range. The total range con‐
siders the capacity of the fuel tank as well as
the electric energy in the high-voltage battery.
If the requirements for electric driving are not
met, the total range considers the content of
the fuel tank only.
Safety information
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is a risk of damage to property.
Refuel promptly.◀
NOTE
If the range is too small, the norma drive
power is not available. Engine functions are not
ensured. There is a risk of damage to property.
Refuel as soon as possible.◀
Display, electric range
The electric range can be dis‐
played via the Onboard Com‐
puter in the instrument cluster.
The display indicates that the
high-voltage battery is dead or
the electric drive is currently not
available.
Display total range
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is shown on the On‐
board Computer.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance
taking curves aggressively, the engine func‐
tion is not always ensured.
The Check Control message is continuously dis‐
played below a certain range.
As soon as a respectively low fuel tank filling
level is reached, MAX eDRIVE is automatically
selected to protect the combustion engine if
the requirements for electric driving are met.
The Steptronic Sport program is not available.
You may continue driving with reduced per‐
formance and exclusively with electric motor
power.
Follow further information on refueling.
Displaying the cruising range
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Range"
Current fuel consump‐
tion
Concept
The current fuel consumption of the combus‐
tion engine and of the electric motor can be
displayed.
Display, electric motor
The current electric consumption is displayed
on the Onboard Computer.
Seite 118
CONTROLS
Displays
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The current electric energy con‐
sumption or generation can be
monitored.
Consumed energy: + sign
Generated energy: - sign
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Current consumption"
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After the ignition is switched on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving distance
or time to the next scheduled maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the type of service re‐
quired may be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
ing.
The service deadline has al‐
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Seite 119
Displays
CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera at the base of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
tions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from
the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐
ing on the situation.
With the navigation system, the system takes
into account the information stored in the navi‐
gation data and also displays speed limits
present on routes without signs.
Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐
ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traf‐
fic signs with speed limitations are detected
and displayed only. Speed limitations due to
entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc.
are not displayed. Speed limits with extra text
characters are always displayed.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic
situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Display
Speed Limit Info is displayed via the Onboard
Computer.
Press button on the turn signal lever several
times, if needed.
Speed Limit Info is displayed on the Info Display
in the instrument cluster.
Speed Limit Info
The last speed limit detected.
Without a navigation system the
traffic signals are grayed out af‐
ter curves or longer stretches of
roadway.
Seite 120
CONTROLS
Displays
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
With navigation system: Speed
Limit Info is not available.
Without navigation system: no
speed limit or cancellation is de‐
tected.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the
Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
Selection lists
General information
With the buttons on the steering wheel and the
display in the instrument cluster the following
can be displayed or operated:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
Button on the steering
wheel
Function
Move selection up.
Move selection down.
Confirm the selection.
Display
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐
age values.
Seite 121
Displays
CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Calling up information on the Info
Display
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Information is displayed in the Info Display of
the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Info Display
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
the following information in the
Info Display:
▷ Total range.
▷ Range, electric.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average consumption, electric.
▷ Current consumption, fuel.
▷ Current consumption, electric.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Charge state of the high-voltage battery.
▷ Date.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐
play and navigation:
Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ With equipment version with Head-up Dis‐
play and navigation:
Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Speed Limit Info.
▷ Speed.
The unit of some information can be changed.
Setting units, refer to page 33.
Selecting information
You can select what information from the On‐
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Display of the instrument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired information.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
The range is calculated based on your driving
style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
High-voltage battery charge indicator
Concept
Indicates the current charge state of the high-
voltage battery as a percentage.
Safety information
WARNING
Even when it is indicated that the high-
voltage battery is discharged, the high-voltage
system is always still under high voltage. There
is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch or
change live parts, for instance orange high-
Seite 122
CONTROLS
Displays
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
voltage cables, even when the batteries are dis‐
charged.◀
Display
A marking is displayed when SAVE BATTERY is
activated; see arrow. The marking indicates the
high-voltage battery charge state that is to be
maintained or achieved by means of energy re‐
covery.
Average fuel consumption
This is calculated for the period while the en‐
gine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
Onboard Computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Engine temperature display
Displays the current engine temperature, based
on a combination of coolant and engine oil
temperature. As soon as the optimum operat‐
ing temperature has been attained, the indica‐
tor is in the center position.
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en‐
gine, become too hot, a Check Control message
is displayed too.
When the engine temperature is too
high, a red indicator light is displayed.
When the engine oil temperature is too
high, a red indicator light is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 253.
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: distance to
destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
Onboard Computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data on the Control Display, such as average
values.
Seite 123
Displays
CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are available
on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the
fuel consumption, are displayed. The values
can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐
view of a certain distance and can be reset
as often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip
computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle
has come to a standstill.
5. If necessary, "OK"
Driving Excitement
Concept
On the Control Display, sport instruments can
be displayed, and the vehicle state can be
checked before the use of the SPORT program.
Sport instruments
General information
On the Control Display, values for power and
torque are displayed.
Displaying sport instruments
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
4. "Sports instruments"
Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
1.
Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
3. "Sports instruments"
Vehicle state
The following vehicle and surrounding area
data is automatically checked and evaluated in
succession:
▷ Range.
▷ Engine temperature.
▷ External temperature.
▷ SPORT program state.
Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is
displayed.
Checking vehicle state
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
Seite 124
CONTROLS
Displays
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
3. "Sport displays"
4. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:
1. Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has
dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
5. Press the Controller.
Setting your current speed as the speed
warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
5. Press the Controller.
LED ring on the central
instrument cluster
Concept
The LED ring displays light animations to repre‐
sent specific functions.
Basic displays
Basic functions, for instance the tachometer,
can be set to be displayed continually if so de‐
sired.
Event displays
Functions that are only displayed temporarily,
for instance the volume or temperature set‐
tings, can be set as event displays.
Several vehicle assistance functions can also be
displayed on the LED ring. This display corre‐
sponds with the displays of the function in the
respective display.
Example: tachometer
Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster,
the light animations of the tachometer's basic
display show the current RPMs and the respec‐
tive RPM warning thresholds.
Seite 125
Displays
CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Display
▷ Arrow 1: current RPM.
▷ Arrow 2: prewarning field.
▷ Arrow 3: warning field.
Switching on/off LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Center Instrument"
Adjusting the LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Basic display" or "Event display"
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
The brightness can be adjusted when night
lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, for instance the
speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
General information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
up Display. For additional information, see the
chapter on care.
Safety information
WARNING
When extending and retracting the pro‐
jection screen of the Head-up Display, body
parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
projection screen is clear during opening and
closing.◀
NOTE
The Head-up Display consists of sensitive
components that can easily be scraped or dam‐
aged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not place any objects on the Head-up Display,
attach to system components or plug into the
system. Do not move the moving parts man‐
ually.◀
Seite 126
CONTROLS
Displays
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Overview
Switching the Head-up Display on/off
When switching on, the projection lens of the
Head-up Display is extended. When switching
off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display
is retracted again.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument light‐
ing, refer to page 133.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Adjusting the height
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
Seite 127
Displays
CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height
is reached.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
The height of the Head-up Display can also be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 80.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is selected.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
Country timer
Concept
The system provides information on how long
and to what degree the vehicle was driven on
inclined, uneven, unpaved or snow-covered
roads, for example.
General information
The system consists of the following two me‐
nus:
▷ Country Timer: display of the gradient and
unevenness of the routes traveled.
▷ Country Timer Info: display of the best time
and total time since the last reset.
Follow the notes on traveling on poor roads, re‐
fer to page 209.
Opening the menu
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "MINI Country Timer"
3. Select the desired setting.
▷ : display of the Country Timer.
▷ : display of the Country Timer Info.
Display of the Country Timer
Overview
▷ Symbols for road gradient and unevenness,
arrow 1.
▷ Category, arrow 2.
Seite 128
CONTROLS
Displays
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ Pulse value, arrow 3.
Symbols, pulse deflection and pulse
value
When the vehicle is being driven on inclined or
uneven roads, the corresponding symbol lights
up, arrow 1. One or more pulse deflections are
displayed and the pulse value increases, ar‐
row 3.
Categories
As the pulse value increases, the vehicle be‐
comes larger and reaches various levels, ar‐
row 2.
Display of the Country Timer Info
Best time
The shortest driving time necessary to reach
the highest level.
Total time
The total driving time that the vehicle was
driven at the highest level.
Resetting the Country Timer Info
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "MINI Country Timer"
3. "MINI Country Timer Info"
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Reset record time and display": reset‐
ting the best time.
▷ "Reset total time": resetting the total
time.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat
Tire Monitor, refer to page 144.
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 139.
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine
oil level check, refer to page 249.
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
sages are stored in the background and can
be displayed on the Control Display. Dis‐
playing stored Check Control messages, re‐
fer to page 116.
▷ "Service required": Displaying service
requirements, refer to page 119.
Seite 129
Displays
CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Lights
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Rear fog light.
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Cornering light.
Symbol Function
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, low
beams and roadside
parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the ignition
is switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
charged and it would then be impossible to
start the engine.
Canada: when parking, switch on the one-sided
roadside parking light, refer to page 131.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Seite 130
CONTROLS
Lights
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Canada: roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With radio-ready state switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance
point for approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy de‐
lay feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
ambient brightness, individual light functions
may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch:
,
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay illuminated for a particular
time if the high beams are switched on after
radio-ready state is switched off.
Canada: the low beams stay illuminated for a
particular time if the headlight flasher is
switched on after radio-ready state is switched
off.
Setting the duration
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic headlight
control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Seite 131
Lights
CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐
luminated when the low beams are switched
on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently used.
Cornering light
General information
Position of switch:
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched on
depending on the steering angle or the use of
turn signals.
Adaptive headlight
range control
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations in
order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation.
General information
The assistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on, whenever the traffic situation al‐
lows. In the low speed range, the high beams
are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, for instance in towns
and cities.
The high beams can be switched on and off at
any time as usual.
Seite 132
CONTROLS
Lights
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle
equipment: ,
Press and hold button on signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 97.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. In situation that
require this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Concept
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the road‐
way.
Functional requirement
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The green indicator light lights up if
the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 131, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Seite 133
Lights
CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy
lights are controlled automatically.
Thumbwheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
3 Ambient light
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights on and off
manually
Press button.
The reading lights are located in the front next
to the interior light.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
terior.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Changing color
Push the switch forward or back:
manual color change.
Press the switch forward or backward
and hold for approx. 3 seconds, until
the ambient light illuminates several times: au‐
tomatic color change. Push the switch again to
end color changes.
Setting the brightness
Depending on the equipment, the brightness of
the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
the Control Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
Seite 134
CONTROLS
Lights
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 135
Lights
CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Safety
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐
pacts in which safety belts alone would not pro‐
vide adequate protection.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 136
CONTROLS
Safety
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, for instance in less severe accidents or
rear-end collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and may cause additional injuries due
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Follow the information on achieving
the optimum protective effect of the airbag
system.◀
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs
in the floor area and does not support them
on the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats with
integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not place seat cushions or other objects
on the front seats that are not specifically
suited for seats with integrated side air‐
bags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact MINI
Customer Relations for further information.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Seite 137
Safety
CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tended despite the accident severity. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag
system checked, repaired, dismantled and
scrapped by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning light in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning light does not come on when the
ignition is switched on.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
tem is to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Seite 138
CONTROLS
Safety
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when,
for instance a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated in
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured.
After installing a child restraint system, make
sure that the indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that
the child restraint system has been detected
and the front-seat passenger airbags are not
activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐
pends on the positions of the driver's/front pas‐
senger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a relevant Check Control message is dis‐
played. A message also appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
An appropriate Check Control message is dis‐
played.
1.
Move the respective seat all the way for‐
ward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again.
The seat moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the Check Control message disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you if
Seite 139
Safety
CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐
tion pressure and, depending on the model,
the tire temperature.
With use of the system follow further informa‐
tion found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 231.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset
was performed with the correct tire infla‐
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐
formed.
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is
active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message on
the Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning related
to the tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ The system is being reset.
Additonal information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the
actual values read; they may vary depending
on driving style or weather conditions.
Resetting the system
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using
"Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol‐
lowing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Monitor…".
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The resetting
process is completed automatically while driv‐
ing. After successful completion of the reset,
the tires appear in green on the Control Display
and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for
recommended pressures." is displayed.
Seite 140
CONTROLS
Safety
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is a
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and con‐
tinued driving with these tires.◀
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
Measure
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire inflation
pressure in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Seite 141
Safety
CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 237, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires, for instance using the tire
pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. In this case, perform the
reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this
case, have the electronics checked and re‐
placed at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. In this case, perform the
reset.
Possible driving range with a depressurized
tire
The possible driving range varies depending on
the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Seite 142
CONTROLS
Safety
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐
stance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire in‐
flation pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
damage caused by external circumstances.
Failure to perform a reset
The system does not function properly if a reset
has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire
is reported though tire inflation pressures are
correct.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ The system was unable to complete the re‐
set. Perform a system reset again.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS
138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐
tem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi‐
cantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
Seite 143
Safety
CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un‐
der-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han‐
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte‐
nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in‐
flation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continu‐
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐
tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐
riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐
ization was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, an initialization was
performed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can
be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is
active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a
flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming
the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
Seite 144
CONTROLS
Safety
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is a
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and con‐
tinued driving with these tires.◀
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 237, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires, for instance using the tire
pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. In this case, perform the
reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this
case, have the electronics checked and re‐
placed at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Seite 145
Safety
CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the
system.
Possible driving range with a depressurized
tire
The possible driving range varies depending on
the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐
stance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in
all four tires will not be recognized. There‐
fore, check the tire inflation pressure regu‐
larly.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐
ternal circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
The intelligent safety systems can help prevent
an imminent collision.
▷ Approach control warning with City light
braking function, refer to page 147.
▷ Person warning with City light braking func‐
tion, refer to page 150.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic
situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
Seite 146
CONTROLS
Safety
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system lim‐
its, warnings or reactions of the system may not
be output or they may be output too late, in‐
correctly, or without justification. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Approach control warn‐
ing with city light brak‐
ing function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera at the base of the interior mirror con‐
trols the system.
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Seite 147
Safety
CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic
situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system lim‐
its, warnings or reactions of the system may not
be output or they may be output too late, in‐
correctly, or without justification. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings.
Seite 148
CONTROLS
Safety
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via the Central In‐
formation Display (CID).
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected warning time is stored for the
driver profile currently in use.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for instance when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the
distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
a warning, the maximum braking force is used.
Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently
quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the
brake pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the
system may assist with braking.When the vehi‐
cle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may
come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
Seite 149
Safety
CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Follow the information
regarding the system limits and actively inter‐
vene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
the more warnings are displayed. Therefore,
there may also be an excess of premature or
unjustified warnings and reactions.
Person warning with City
light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐
destrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a colli‐
sion with pedestrians, and support this with a
light braking function.
The camera at the base of the interior mirror
controls the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
The system reacts to people who are within the
detection range of the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
Seite 150
CONTROLS
Safety
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traffic
situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system lim‐
its, warnings or reactions of the system may not
be output or they may be output too late, in‐
correctly, or without justification. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Seite 151
Safety
CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or
make an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
a warning, the maximum braking force is used.
Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently
quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the
brake pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the
system may assist with braking.When the vehi‐
cle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may
come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Follow the information
regarding the system limits and actively inter‐
vene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lights indicate emergency
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce
the risk of a rear-end collision.
Seite 152
CONTROLS
Safety
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the brake
lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the flash‐
ers additionally light up.
Alertness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation,
it is recommended that the driver takes a
break.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess one's physical
state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue
may not be detected or not be detected in
time. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions.◀
Function
The system is switched on each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of
trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations, for instance and will either output an
incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
Seite 153
Safety
CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically with‐
out intervention by the driver in certain situa‐
tions. This can reduce the risk of a further colli‐
sion and the consequences thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released au‐
tomatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
Harder vehicle braking
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer‐
tain situations to a halt quicker.
To do this, for a short time the braking pressure
applied when stepping on the brake pedal
must be higher than the braking pressure ach‐
ieved by the automatic braking function. This
interrupts automatic braking.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐
sive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Seite 154
CONTROLS
Safety
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by applying brakes to the
individual wheels.
A change in the drive type, refer to page 47,
can be made to improve traction.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
ditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 156, is a version of the DSC where for‐
ward momentum is optimized.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
When driving with roof load, for instance
with roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety
may not be ensured in driving-critical situations
due to the elevated center of gravity. There is a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to property.
Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control
DSC when driving with roof load.◀
Seite 155
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
Depending on the operating state of the high-
voltage system, the drive of the vehicle auto‐
matically switches between front-wheel, rear-
wheel and four-wheel drive. If DSC is
deactivated, this may result in automatic
change of the drive type for unstable driving
situations.
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation
occurs in the following situations:
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION
or DSC OFF mode.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control where forward momentum is opti‐
mized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions, for instance unplowed
snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with
somewhat limited vehicle stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Drive carefully.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
Seite 156
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the
vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
individually when a sporty driving style is used.
Due to the variable drive configuration, this in‐
tervention can be done either on the front axle,
the rear axle or on both axles simultaneously.
MINI Driving Modes
switch
Concept
The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose
between three different programs.
Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will ac‐
tivate the particular program.
Operating the programs
MINI Driving Modes switch Program
SPORT
MID
GREEN
MID
MID provides balanced tuning.
With each starting operation, MID is activated
using the Start/Stop button.
GREEN
Concept
GREEN, refer to page 213, provides consistent
tuning to maximize range.
Activating GREEN
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward
until GREEN is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1.
Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
activated.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
activated.
SPORT
Concept
Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for
greater driving agility.
Activating SPORT
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward
until SPORT is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Seite 157
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving
programs in Driving mode:
▷ GREEN, refer to page 157.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the MINI Driving Modes
switch displays a list of pro‐
grams, which can be selected.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill
grades. The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Servotronic
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steer‐
ing function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,
and makes steering more direct when driving
at faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel or a comfortable steering response
is conveyed.
Seite 158
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Camera-based cruise con‐
trol
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle accel‐
erates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The speed is adjusted as far as the given situa‐
tion allows.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
speed.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic trans‐
missions: if the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a
halt, and then proceeds to drive again shortly
thereafter, the system is able to detect this
within the given system limits.
General information
A camera on the interior mirror is used to de‐
tect vehicles driving ahead.
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, for instance in the
following situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving ve‐
hicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.◀
Seite 159
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 160.
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 161.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 160.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 162.
Reduce distance, refer to page 162.
Increase distance, refer to page 162.
Increase speed, refer to page 161.
Reduce speed, refer to page 161.
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's ser‐
ies, optional features and country specifica‐
tions.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic trans‐
missions: the system can also be activated
while the vehicle is stationary.
The max. speed that can be set is
85 mph/140 km/h.
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise
control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Display in the instrument cluster lights
up.
Display in the instrument cluster lights
up. The current speed is adopted as de‐
sired speed and displayed with symbol.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
Seite 160
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Switching off
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic trans‐
missions: when switching off while stationary,
depress the brake pedal simultaneously.
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
Press button on the steering wheel.
With the Stop&Go function for Step‐
tronic transmissions: when interrupting while
stationary, depress the brake pedal simultane‐
ously.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐
paired, for instance by soiling, heavy pre‐
cipitation or glare effects from the sun.
▷ With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
transmissions: following a stationary period
of approx. 3 seconds, after the vehicle was
braked to a stop by the system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press or button in the interrupted state.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the
symbol.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
switched on, if necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press button.
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired speed
is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
or button: hold down to repeat the ac‐
tion.
Adjusting distance
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits,
braking can be late. There is a risk of accidents
or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the
traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance
to the traffic and weather conditions and main‐
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by
braking.◀
Seite 161
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Reduce distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed in
the left part of the instrument cluster.
Increase distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
The set distance is briefly displayed in
the left part of the instrument cluster.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed and distance
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted. Cruise control is continued with
the stored values. The selected distance is
briefly displayed in the Info Display.
Switching distance control on/off
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not react to traffic driv‐
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Adjust the desired
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
needed.◀
Switching distance control off
Press and hold this button.
Or:
Press and hold this button.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up.
To switch distance control back on, press one of
the two buttons again briefly.
After changing over distance control, a Check
Control message is displayed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed and stored speed
In addition to the indicator light, the de‐
sired speed is displayed in the Info Dis‐
play.
▷ Display lights up green: system is active, the
display indicates the desired speed.
▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐
rupted, the display indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance from the vehicle driving
ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por‐
tion of the Info Display.
Seite 162
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically after
the system is switched on.
Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
With the Stop&Go function for Step‐
tronic transmissions:
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has
driven away.
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, activate
ACC as follows:
▷ By briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
▷ By pressing the RES CNCL button.
▷ By pressing the or button.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,
if necessary.
The system has been interrupted or dis‐
tance control is temporarily suppressed
because the accelerator pedal is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator pedal
is being pressed; a vehicle was de‐
tected.
Displays in the Head-up Display
The information from Active Cruise Control can
also be displayed in the Head-up Display.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
▷ For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-
moving road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking
lighting at night.
Seite 163
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
lected distance in certain situations, including if
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system
requests that the driver intervene by braking
and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
With the Stop&Go function for
Steptronic transmissions: driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ From bumps in the road.
In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range. Sit‐
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle
driving ahead will not be detected or will be
detected very late.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates
you may compensate it by briefly accelerating.
After releasing the accelerator pedal the system
is reactivated and controls speed independ‐
ently.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un‐
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Seite 164
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐
ditions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed may not be maintained on
uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐
tem fails or was automatically deactivated.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When an object was not correctly detected.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
General information
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet con‐
ditions, or on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 166.
Store speed, refer to page 166.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 166.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 167.
Seite 165
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Button Function
Increase speed, refer to page 166.
Reduce speed, refer to page 166.
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise
control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up.
The current speed is adopted as the de‐
sired speed and is displayed with the
symbol in the instrument cluster.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press
or button in the interrupted state.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press button.
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired speed
is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ or button: pressing it to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the
button is released, the vehicle maintains its
final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the
resistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐
erate more rapidly.
Seite 166
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Calling up stored speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator light
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
The desired speed is displayed together
with the symbol.
▷ Display lights up green: system is
active, the display indicates the de‐
sired speed.
▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐
rupted, the display indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No display: system is switched off.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is avail‐
able - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
The maneuvering range, depending on obsta‐
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from
the object.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at ap‐
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Seite 167
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control is activated, the warning can be
delayed due to physical circumstances. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
is not yet active.◀
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ With front PDC: when obstacles are de‐
tected behind or in front of the vehicle by
PDC and the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h.
With front PDC: automatic activation on obsta‐
cle detection can be switched off. Via the Cen‐
tral Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re‐
spective equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g.,
if an object is detected to the left rear of the ve‐
Seite 168
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously lo‐
cated both in front of and behind the vehicle,
an alternating continuous signal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
trol Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in col‐
ors: red, green and yellow.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Follow the information
regarding the system limits and actively inter‐
vene, if needed.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles or
loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
Seite 169
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐
stacle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground
garages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
stance sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a continuous
tone alternating between the front and rear
speakers. As soon as the malfunction due
to other ultrasound sources is no longer
present, the system is again fully functional.
With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch
off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detec‐
tion, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switch‐
ing on/off.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Red symbol is displayed, and the range
of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Overview
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Seite 170
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Switching the view via the Central
Information Display (CID)
With PDC Park Distance Control activated:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
and trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐
tions.
Activating the assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, ob‐
stacles are highlighted.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Seite 171
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can be superimposed on
the image of the rearview camera.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Obstacle marking
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacle
markings can be faded into the image of the
rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the Controller.
Seite 172
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects
such as ledges may not be recognized by the
system.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, certain
assistance functions also take into account data
from PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Therefore, do
not estimate the distance from the objects on
the display.
Parking assistant
Concept
This system assists the driver in parking parallel
to the road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage
to property. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.◀
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control applies in addition.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Seite 173
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the wheel housing.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Indicator on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system status
Seite 174
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking
assistant is activated and the parking space
search is active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
1. Press the park assistance button or
shift into reverse gear to switch on the
parking assistant, refer to page 174. Acti‐
vate the parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a
distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the display, refer to page 174.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ "Parking Assistant"
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the
instruction on the display.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ When switching into other functions of the
radio.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 174, and follow the instructions on the
display.
Switching off
The system can be switched off as follows:
Seite 175
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ Switching off the ignition.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of damage to property. Follow the information
regarding the system limits and actively inter‐
vene, if needed.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles or
loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
▷ The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending on
the tire size.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 176
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Climate control
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality inside the vehicle is improved by
an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter, and a
climate-control system for regulating tempera‐
ture, air flow, and recirculated-air mode.
In addition there are other functions which de‐
pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic
climate control, and parked-car ventilation.
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution settings
2 Air flow
3 Temperature
4 Seat heating, right 76
5 Air conditioning
6 Recirculated-air mode
7 Rear window defroster
8 Windshield defroster
Seite 177
Climate control
CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
9 Seat heating, left 76
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Switching off
Turn the wheel for air flow all the
way to the left.
Temperature
Concept
The system heats or cools, depending on the
set temperature.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can be cooled via the A/C but‐
ton with the engine running and/or with drive-
ready state activated.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air conditioning
switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The air conditioner produces condensation wa‐
ter, refer to page 208, that will exit from below
the vehicle.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-
air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐
tain amount of time, depending on the external
temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Seite 178
CONTROLS
Climate control
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Operation
Turn the ring to set the desired
air flow.
The higher the air flow, the more
effective the heating or cooling
will be.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.
Controlling the air distribution manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
dows and remove condensation:
▷ Direct the air distribution onto the win‐
dows.
▷ Increasing the air flow.
▷ Increase the temperature.
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Windshield defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
For permanent activation, press the button for
longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the
button again.
The rear window defroster can only be acti‐
vated continuously at an external temperature
below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out‐
put is reduced.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 255.
Seite 179
Climate control
CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 76
9 Maximum cooling
10 Air conditioning
11 Recirculated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster
13 Windshield defroster
14 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
sation
15 Seat heating, left 76
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Switching off
Turn wheel for air flow to the left
until the control switches off.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
Seite 180
CONTROLS
Climate control
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
by using the maximum cooling or heating
power, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can be cooled via the A/C but‐
ton with the engine running and/or with drive-
ready state activated.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 208, develops
and drains underneath the vehicle. This is nor‐
mal.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
General information
The function is available with external tempera‐
tures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
engine running.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and air circulation mode.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity and outside influences, the air is di‐
rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
body, and into the floor area.
The following features are switched on auto‐
matically with the AUTO program:
▷ The air conditioning, refer to page 181.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Seite 181
Climate control
CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Turn the ring to set the desired
intensity from soft to intensive.
The set intensity is displayed via the position of
the illuminated LED segment.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
The outside air supply is shut off and the inte‐
rior air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut-
off automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐
uously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐
side air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-
air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐
tain amount of time, depending on the external
temperature.
If windows are fogged over, switch off the recir‐
culating mode and press the AUTO button.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO
program first.
Operation
Turn the ring to set the desired
air flow.
The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via
illuminated LED segments.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Controlling the air distribution manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
Seite 182
CONTROLS
Climate control
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Upper body region.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
If there is window condensation, switch on the
air conditioning too.
Windshield defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The front window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
For permanent activation, press the button for
longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the
button again.
The rear window defroster can only be acti‐
vated continuously at an external temperature
below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater out‐
put is reduced.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 255.
Ventilation
Setting
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
justed:
▷ Direct ventilation:
The air flow is directly pointed onto the per‐
son. The air flow heats or cools noticeably,
depending on the adjusted temperature.
▷ Indirect ventilation:
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air
is directly routed into the car's interior.
Front ventilation
▷ Turn knob for continuous opening and clos‐
ing of the vents.
▷ Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the
vent flow, arrows.
Seite 183
Climate control
CONTROLS
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos‐
ing of the vents, arrow 2.
Stationary climate con‐
trol
Concept
Stationary climate control cools or heats the
car's interior prior to departure to a comforta‐
ble temperature.
The system automatically cools, vents, and
heats depending on the ambient and set tem‐
perature. Snow and ice may be removed more
easily.
General information
The stationary climate control can be switched
on and off directly or via a preset departure
time:
▷ Direct operation, refer to page 184.
▷ Preselected departure times, refer to
page 185.
The air automatically exits through the vents to
the windshield, the side windows, the upper
body region and into the floor area.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time.
If stationary climate control is used during the
charging process, less air conditioning capacity
will be required while driving. This optimizes
the range.
Functional requirements
▷ Motor switched off and/or drive-ready state
deactivated.
▷ High-voltage battery sufficiently charged or
charging cable connected.
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐
charged, it can take some time after con‐
necting the charging cable, until the sta‐
tionary climate control will be functional.
▷ Direct operation or departure time prese‐
lected: depends on internal, external, and
set desired temperature.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ The ensure the starting capability of the ve‐
hicle, the stationary climate control may be
automatically switched off, for instance af‐
ter repeated switching on: switch the drive-
ready state on and off and the system is
available again.
▷ The vents are open to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
Concept
The system can be switched on or off directly.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time.
Via the Central Information Display
(CID):
The system can be switched on or off via the
Central Information Display (CID).
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Activate now"
Seite 184
CONTROLS
Climate control
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Climate control at departure time
Concept
Different departure times can be adjusted to
ensure a comfortable interior temperature in
the vehicle at the time of departure.
The activation time is automatically determined
based on the temperature.
The system promptly switches on before the
selected departure time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
Setting the departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. Set the desired departure time, refer to
page 224.
Activating the departure time
If a departure time is to influence the switching
on of the stationary climate control, the respec‐
tive departure time must be activated first.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. "Precondition for departure"
Activate the desired departure time.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the departure time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the stationary climate control
has been switched on.
Seite 185
Climate control
CONTROLS
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Integrated Universal Re‐
mote Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
remote-controlled systems, such as garage
door drives, barriers, or lighting systems. The
integrated Universal Remote Control replaces
up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To op‐
erate the remote control, the buttons on the in‐
terior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for
the particular system is required in order to
program the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, such as the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated Universal Re‐
mote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is gen‐
erally compatible with the integrated Universal
Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Overview
1 LED
2 Programmable keys
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Seite 186
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all
programming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of
the interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance between
the interior mirror and the hand-held trans‐
mitter and repeat the step. Several more
attempts at different distances may be nec‐
essary. Wait at least 15 seconds between
attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the interior
mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the sys‐
tem to be controlled features a rolling code
radio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press the
programmed button on the interior mirror lon‐
ger. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
radio system. Flashing and continuous illumina‐
tion of the LED will repeat for approximately
20 seconds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated Universal Remote Control and
the system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish syn‐
chronization. Once synchronization is com‐
plete, the programmed function will be car‐
ried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the hand-held
transmitter.
Seite 187
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior
mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED
flashing faster indicates that the button on
the interior mirror has been programmed.
The system can then be controlled by the
button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at most
60 seconds, change the distance and re‐
peat the programming starting with step 4.
Several more attempts at different distan‐
ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 sec‐
onds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held trans‐
mitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, such as the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated Universal Re‐
mote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mir‐
ror while the engine is running or when the ig‐
nition is started. To do this, hold down the but‐
ton within receiving range of the system until
the function is activated. The interior mirror
LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes rapidly. All stored functions will be de‐
leted. The functions cannot be deleted individ‐
ually.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such
as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the control
button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Seite 188
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set
compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the
number of the compass zone that corre‐
sponds with your location appears in the
mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direction
of travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
objects or overhead power lines near the
vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on
the display. Next, drive in a complete circle
at least once at a speed of no more than
4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful,
the "C" is replaced by the points of the
compass.
Seite 189
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control but‐
ton again to switch between English "E" and
German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
To provide protection against glare, fold the
sun visor down or pivot it to the side.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover.
When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting
switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette
lighter
Overview
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup
holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the
center console.
Ashtray
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash‐
tray from the cup holder.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with the hot heating element or
the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire and
injuries. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its
handle. Make sure that children do not use the
cigarette lighter and burn themselves.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when the ignition or drive-
ready state is switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Seite 190
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
of the airbags, such as portable navigation de‐
vices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or
be thrown around in the car's interior during
unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that devices and cables are not in the airbag's
area of unfolding.◀
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
In the front center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area.
USB interface/AUX-IN port
Concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be connected
to the USB interface.
A mobile audio device, for instance a MP3
player, can be connected using the AUX-IN
port.
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec‐
tion of mobile devices to the USB interface in
the section on USB connections, refer to
page 38.
Seite 191
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
In the center console
The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo‐
cated at the front in the center console.
Under the center armrest
The USB interface is located under the center
armrest.
Seite 192
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Overview
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
▷ Storage compartment under the driver's
seat.
▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐
rest.
▷ Storage compartment in front of the cup
holders.
▷ Clothes hooks
▷ Storage compartments in the cargo area.
▷ Storage tray in the center console.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
Glove compartment
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Seite 193
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Driver's seat
There is a storage compartment under the driv‐
er's seat.
Compartments in the
doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.◀
Center armrest
General information
The center armrest contains a storage compart‐
ment.
Opening
Press button, arrow 1, and open center armrest
upward, arrow 2.
Set the incline
The center armrest can be adjusted in several
tilt settings.
Cup holders
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Use light-weight, unbreakable,
and sealable containers. Do not transport hot
beverages. Do not force objects into the cup
holder.◀
Front
In the center console.
Rear
General information
The cup holder is located in the center armrest.
Seite 194
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
Safety information
NOTE
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.◀
Clothes hooks
General information
The clothes hooks are located above the rear
doors.
Safety information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk
of an accident. When suspending clothing arti‐
cles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they
will not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of damage to property. Only
hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing
articles, from the clothes hooks.◀
Seite 195
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Cargo area
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Loading
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing
lane stability, lengthening the braking distances
and changing the steering response. There is a
risk of an accident. Pay attention to the permit‐
ted load capacity of the tires and never exceed
the permitted gross weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be
hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow
and secure objects and cargo properly.◀
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
area.◀
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1.
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
Seite 196
CONTROLS
Cargo area
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet
straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
With storage compartment package: to secure
the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the
cargo area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Cargo cover
General information
When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is
raised.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐
jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
Removing
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can
be removed.
1.
Detach the left and right retaining straps at
the tailgate.
Seite 197
Cargo area
CONTROLS
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on
the left and right.
Installing
1.
Slide the cargo cover forward horizontally
into the two side brackets until it audibly
engages.
2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at
the tailgate.
Storage compartments in
the cargo area
Storage compartment on the side
A storage compartment is located on the left
side.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects,
such as shopping bags, from the multi-function
hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo area if it has been appropriately se‐
cured.◀
The cargo area contains two multi-function
hooks.
Storage space under
cargo floor panel
NOTE
The storage space under the cargo floor
panel is only suitable for soft objects. Hard ob‐
jects may result in damage to the vehicle elec‐
trical system in the event of an accident. There
is a risk of damage to property. Only stow soft
objects under the cargo floor panel.◀
Enlarging the cargo
area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrests or by moving the
rear seat backrest into the cargo position.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The side rear seat backrests and the
center section can be folded down separately.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the rear.
Seite 198
CONTROLS
Cargo area
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse‐
cured cargo can be thrown into the car's inte‐
rior; for instance, in the event of an accident,
braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest
is locked after folding it back.◀
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to unintentional
unlocking of the rear backrests by the straps.
There is a risk of injury. Do not fasten any ob‐
jects to the straps for unlocking the rear back‐
rests.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
Folding down the rear seat backrest
from the rear
Pull the strap forward. The rear seat backrest
folds forward.
Cargo position
Concept
The rear seat backrests can be separately
moved through several tilt stages into an up‐
right loading position.
Settings
1.
Pull the strap.
2. Set the loading position of the rear seat
backrest as required.
3. Latch the rear seat backrest.
Seite 199
Cargo area
CONTROLS
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Fold back the backrest
1. Pull the strap.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward.
Variable cargo area
floor
Concept
With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo
area can be configured corresponding to trans‐
port requirements.
General information
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to
page 196.
Removing the cargo floor panel
1.
Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel
upward.
2. Grasp the cargo floor panel at the rear and
fold it upward.
3. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from
the brackets.
Inserting the cargo floor panel
1. Push the cargo area floor into the supports
at a shallow angle. The cargo area floor
must engage noticeably.
2. Fold the cargo area floor over downward.
MINI Picnic Bench
Concept
The MINI Picnic Bench provides a comfortable
seating surface on the loading lip of the vehicle.
General information
Only use the MINI Picnic Bench while the vehi‐
cle is parked and with the tailgate open. When
the MINI Picnic Bench is not in use, fold it to‐
gether to prevent soiling and damage.
In vehicles with a no-touch opening and closing
tailgate:
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently
by an unconscious or alleged recognized foot
movement.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
Seite 200
CONTROLS
Cargo area
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Overview
The MINI Picnic Bench is located on the under‐
side of the cargo area floor.
Mounting
1.
Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel
upward.
2. Place the MINI Picnic Bench on the front
part of the cargo floor panel and attach it to
the rear part of the cargo floor panel using
the four snaps.
3. Fold down the MINI Picnic Bench toward
the rear. The MINI Picnic Bench is fastened
with magnets.
4. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor
downward.
To disassemble the MINI Picnic Bench, proceed
in reverse order.
Folding down
1.
Lift the rear part of the cargo area floor.
2. Grasp the MINI Picnic Bench in the middle
and pull it back and up against the force of
the magnets.
3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor
downward and place the MINI Picnic Bench
Seite 201
Cargo area
CONTROLS
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
over the loading lip of the cargo area. Place
a protective cloth over the bumper.
Folding up
Fold rear part of the cargo floor panel upward.
The MINI Picnic Bench swings against the un‐
derside of the cargo area floor and is fastened
there with magnets.
Seite 202
CONTROLS
Cargo area
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Seite 203
Cargo area
CONTROLS
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react with a
delay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal‐
ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐
servatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐
serve the break-in procedures of the respective
parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Safety information
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other traf‐
fic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
Seite 206
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
of damage to property. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust gas system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
for instance caused by the exhaust gas system.
If combustible materials, such as leaves or
grass, come in contact with hot parts of the ex‐
haust gas system, these materials can ignite.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Do not remove the heat shields in‐
stalled and never apply undercoating to them.
Make sure that no combustible materials can
come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driv‐
ing operation, idle or during parking. Do not
touch the hot exhaust gas system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. If possible, in the car's interior
use only mobile phones with direct connections
to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mu‐
tual interference and deflect the radiation from
the car's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the follow‐
ing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. When driving through water, do not ex‐
ceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
Seite 207
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Objects in the area around the pedals
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
gently press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them against
corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
Safety information
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
on the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state, in the GREEN Mode driving
program, or with drive-ready state switched off,
safety-relevant functions, for instance engine
braking effect, braking force boost, and steer‐
ing assistance, are restricted or not available at
all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive in
idle state, in the GREEN Mode driving program,
or with drive-ready state switched off.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle.
Ground clearance
NOTE
If ground clearance is insufficient, there
might be contact with the front or rear spoiler,
for instance when driving over curbs or enter‐
ing into underground vehicle parking garages.
There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure
that there is sufficient ground clearance availa‐
ble.◀
Seite 208
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Roof-mounted luggage
rack
General information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Driving on poor roads
Concept
Because of its greater ground clearance, the
vehicle can be driven on a variety of road types
and qualities.
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in unpaved areas, for instance
stones or branches, can damage the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
drive on unpaved terrain.◀
When driving on poor roads
For your own safety, for the safety of passen‐
gers and of the vehicle, heed the following
points:
▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before
starting a trip; do not take risks while driv‐
ing.
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface condi‐
tions. The steeper and more uneven the
road surface, the slower the speed.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to
near the MAX mark.
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in
contact with the ground. The ground clear‐
ance may vary depending on the vehicle
load.
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the
accelerator so that driving stability control
systems can distribute the driving force to
the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction
Control if available.
After a trip on poor roads
Note the following to maintain driving safety:
▷ Clear heavy soiling from the body.
Seite 209
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ Keep the wheels and tires free of mud,
snow, ice, etc., and check them for dam‐
age.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
competition.
Seite 210
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sion values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
ing style and regular maintenance can influ‐
ence fuel consumption and environmental im‐
pact.
Remove unnecessary
cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which are
no longer required following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and
glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel
consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without de‐
lay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Seite 211
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a
halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine
during longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Switch off any functions
that are not currently
needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
Have maintenance car‐
ried out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
MINI recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a MINI service center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer
to page 255.
Using the hybrid system
efficiently
Concept
The vehicle's hybrid system runs automatically.
Through foresighted driving, the hybrid proper‐
ties are efficiently used, i.e., fuel consumption
and energy recovery are optimized.
Optimizing energy recovery
Types of energy recovery
Energy recovery is used to charge the high-
voltage battery. Energy recovery is important
for the supply of electrical components and
thus a prerequisite for fuel efficiency. Energy
recovery appears in three stages during coast‐
ing and braking:
▷ Low energy recovery: while coasting to a
halt without stepping on the brake.
▷ Average energy recovery: while decelerat‐
ing slightly by gently pressing the brake
pedal.
▷ Maximum energy recovery: when pressing
the brake pedal somewhat more firmly pro‐
vided that the pointer remains in the mid‐
dle area of the CHARGE indicator in the in‐
strument cluster, refer to page 111.
Optimum energy recovery
Foresighted driving and decelerating helps with
optimizing energy recovery.
Seite 212
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
As soon as the display shows the maximum en‐
ergy recovery, only press the brake pedal
harder if required by the situation.
Exemplary traffic situations for fuel
efficiency
In many driving situations, the hybrid system
allows for a particularly efficient energy man‐
agement.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic:
The combustion engine is switched on or
over automatically by the hybrid system.
▷ Driving with constant speed:
The electric motor relieves the combustion
engine periodically by also being switched
on.
Optimizing fuel consumption
Charging the vehicle regularly
Charge the vehicle regularly and completely us‐
ing a suitable charging device. This will reduce
fuel consumption due to the use of electrical
energy.
Longer idle periods, refer to page 275, can re‐
duce the charge state of the high-voltage bat‐
tery.
Avoiding the use of the combustion
engine
Follow the following information to avoid using
the combustion engine:
▷ Set the characteristics of the hybrid system
to MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 93.
▷ Follow the indicators in the instrument clus‐
ter regarding electric driving, refer to
page 111.
Using the navigation system regularly
Use the navigation system also for familiar and
regularly traveled routes. When the navigation
system destination guidance is active, the hy‐
brid system uses the existing navigation data.
The upcoming course of the road is analyzed.
Hybrid operation adapts to the specific route
sections.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available,
for example.
GREEN Mode
Concept
GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort features, for instance
the climate control output, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
matically decoupled from the transmission in
the D selector lever position and the engine is
switched off. The D selector lever position re‐
mains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.
Activating GREEN Mode
Press the MINI Driving Modes
switch downward until GREEN is
displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1.
Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Select the desired setting.
Via the Central Information Display
(CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Seite 213
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating the functions
The following functions can be activated/deac‐
tivated:
▷ "GREEN speed warning":
▷ "GREEN climate control"
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
GREEN Limit
▷ Activate the GREEN Limit:
"GREEN speed warning":
A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the
set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
▷ Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit:
"Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
GREEN climate control
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling
of the car's interior fuel consumption can be
economized.
The power output to the seat heater and exte‐
rior mirror is reduced.
GREEN potential savings
Shows potential savings with the current set‐
tings in percentages.
Seite 214
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Seite 215
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
MOVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Charging the vehicle
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Concept
The vehicle can be charged using various
charging cables at charging stations or house‐
hold sockets. Control and monitoring of the
charging process are handled completely auto‐
matically. The charge current strength can be
set via the Central Information Display (CID).
General information
High-voltage battery
The high-voltage battery is used as an energy
accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be
charged by energy recovery during the trip or
via the power grid.
In order to operate the high-voltage battery
optimally, charge the vehicle regularly and
completely on a compatible charger.
When charging via the power grid, you can
chose between the following variants.
▷ Level 1 charging via a household socket.
▷ Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging sta‐
tion.
Level 1 charging is possible via a household
socket with a voltage of 120 volts.
For optimal use of the energy from the power
mains, charging at a charging station, for in‐
stance BMW Wallbox, is recommended.
Charge current
General information
The charge current strength is indicated in am‐
peres.
The vehicle cannot automatically detect the
maximum permissible charge current strength
of the power grid during charging via a house‐
hold socket or charging station.
Level 1 charging
Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own
household socket, as well as when charging at
external electrical power sockets in Level 1, the
allowed charge current strength must be deter‐
mined, for instance by a qualified electrician.
The charge current strength for Level 1 charg‐
ing, refer to page 223, can be adjusted in the
vehicle in three levels.
At delivery, the charge current for
Level 1 charging is set to the lowest level.
Depending on the country-specific version, one
of several ampere ratings is printed on the
Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rating is
the limit which must be adhered to for the ve‐
hicle if the charge current is set to the highest
level. Depending on the charging cable, the
charge current strength may vary when lower
levels are set.
Seite 218
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Overview
Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting
"Max." "Reduced" "Low"
8 A 8 A 6 A 6 A
10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6 A
12 A 12 A 9 A 6 A
15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A
Depending on the charge current setting, the
charging duration changes.
Maintaining charge state
Should it be necessary, for instance to conserve
the electric range for a later point in time on
the trip, the current charge state of the high-
voltage battery can be maintained or increased
with SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 94.
Safety information
WARNING
Improper working with electrical current
can lead to an electric shock due to high vol‐
tages or high currents. There is a risk of fire or
danger to life. Observe the general safety regu‐
lations when working with electrical current.◀
WARNING
A faulty and incorrectly designed charg‐
ing device at the charging location can cause
damage to the vehicle and overload the power
mains at the charging location. There is a risk of
fire and a risk of injury.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, prior to your first use of a charging loca‐
tion, you have the compatibility of the follow‐
ing components confirmed:
▷ Charging cable.
▷ Charging station.
▷ Household socket and connected circuits.◀
WARNING
Damaged or worn charging devices, for
instance worn contacts, can heat up. There is a
risk of fire. Only use charging devices in proper
state.◀
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily
flammable materials is not maintained, simul‐
taneous charging and filling with fuel can cause
a risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not fill the vehicle with
fuel and charge it simultaneously.◀
WARNING
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. High voltage is applied at the
charging connection. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that work on the charging connection, for in‐
stance cleaning, be performed by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
Charging cable
General information
Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charging
cable or the permanently installed charging ca‐
ble of a charging station to charge the vehicle.
Seite 219
Charging the vehicle
MOBILITY
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Different charging cables can be required de‐
pending on the country.
Safety information
WARNING
Non-compatible charging cables or un‐
suitable charging stations can heat up and
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of
fire. Use charging cables or charging stations
for charging that are suitable for the respective
vehicle type.
A dealer's service center will be glad to provide
information about suitable charging cables.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the charging cable can
prevent charging and lead to damage, for in‐
stance cable fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the
charging cable only for charging the vehicle,
and do not extend it using cables or adapters.◀
WARNING
Damaged charging cables can heat up or
lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire
or a risk of injury. Use undamaged charging ca‐
bles only.◀
Level 1 charging cable
The vehicle is supplied with a Level 1 charging
cable.
With the Level 1 charging cable, it is permissible
to perform charging from grounded household
sockets. At the power connection of a house‐
hold socket, charging is done with alternating
current.
When a Level 1 charging cable is used, this may
produce efficiency values other than indicated
on the energy label.
Level 2 charging cable
The Level 2 charging cable makes it possible to
quickly recharge at sockets of designated
Level 2 charging stations using a special plug.
Charging is performed with alternating current
at designated Level 2 charging stations. The
charging process can be completed faster than
at household sockets.
A charging current strength of up to maxi‐
mum 16 A is possible.
If necessary, the charging cable is attached to
the charging station.
Storage
The Level 1 charging cable is located in a bag in
the cargo area.
Store charging cable again in the bag after use.
Attach the bag to the designated eyelet.
If required, store the charging cable with the in‐
stalled plug cover to prevent moisture in the
charging cable plug.
Connecting
Charging socket flap
The charging socket flap is located on the left
side of the vehicle.
Always keep charging socket clean and unob‐
structed.
Seite 220
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Keep the charging socket flap closed when the
charging socket is not used.
Connecting the charging cable
To connect, engage selector lever position P,
deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the
vehicle. Set the parking brake, if needed.
1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.
2. Remove cover of the charging cable plug, if
needed.
3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
to the port on the charging station.
4. Insert the charging cable plug correspond‐
ing to the charging socket, and push it in
until it engages.
Removing
When the vehicle is locked, the charging cable
is locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing
the cable.
If necessary, clean the area between charging
socket flap and charging socket, for instance
from snow, before removing it.
1.
Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it is
locked.
Charging cable is unlocked.
2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the
gripping areas.
Charging process is interrupted.
3. Remove the charging cable from the charg‐
ing socket, arrow 2.
4. Put the charging socket lid back on.
5. Close the charging socket flap.
6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if
needed.
7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
from the port on the charging station as
needed.
8. Stow the charging cable.
At a charging station, insert the perma‐
nently installed charging cable in the place
provided for it.
Manually unlocking the
charging cable
The charging cable is locked when the vehicle
is locked and during the charging process.
In case of an electrical malfunction, the charg‐
ing cable can be manually unlocked.
1.
Open the hood.
2. Pull the knob.
Seite 221
Charging the vehicle
MOBILITY
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Charging cable is manually unlocked.
3. Removing the charging cable, refer to
page 221.
Charging process
Safety information
WARNING
Improper use of the power mains con‐
nection can lead to damage, for instance cable
fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Use the charging cable only for
charging the vehicle, and do not extend it using
cables or adapters.◀
WARNING
If the charge current strength is adjusted
incorrectly, the power mains of the household
socket can be overloaded and overheat. There
is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current
strength to the power mains prior to charging
on household sockets. With unknown power
networks, set on the lowest level.◀
Starting the charging process
1.
Engage selector lever position P. Set the
parking brake, if needed.
2. Planning the charging process, refer to
page 223.
3. Switch off drive-ready state.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
to the port on the charging station.
5. Open charging socket flap.
6. Connect charging cable to the vehicle, refer
to page 220.
7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
At high temperatures, the high-voltage battery
is initially cooled. There may be a delay before
charging starts. If the high-voltage battery is
discharged, cooling of the high-voltage battery
may not be possible. The charging process can‐
not be started.
The charging process may take longer under
extremely low or high temperatures.
Display of the charging status
Indicator light at the charging socket
An indicator light is located on the charging
socket.
Charging status
Light Charging status
White Charging cable can be con‐
nected or removed.
Flashes or‐
ange
Charging process is being pre‐
pared.
Yellow The charging process starts at
the set time.
Flashes yel‐
low
Charging process is active.
Seite 222
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Light Charging status
Flashes red Fault in the charging process.
Green Charging process is completed.
When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light
goes out after some time.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the yellow indi‐
cator light flashes continuously. The other indi‐
cator lights go out after some time.
Press the button of the remote control to
check the charging status. The charging status
is indicated on the indicator light. In some
cases the vehicle is locked.
Additional messages about the charging status,
for instance the probable end of charging or
the planned departure time, can be shown in
the instrument cluster or on the Control Dis‐
play.
Planning the charging process
General information
The charging process can be adapted to con‐
straints, for instance the cost of electricity. The
vehicle can control the charging process in such
a way that the charging process is completed at
the departure time. A departure time must be
set for this purpose, refer to page 224.
The following settings are available:
▷ Immediate charging.
▷ Set time window for favorable charging.
▷ Set the charge current for charging via a
Level 1 charging cable.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can
be made via the Central Information Display
(CID). Settings for stationary climate control and
charging process are also accepted for planned
departure times.
Immediate charging
The charging process starts as soon as the
charging cable is connected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Charge immediately"
Setting time window for favorable
charging
When a departure time is set, a time window
for charging with a favorable electricity rate can
be set via the Central Information Display (CID).
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Charge for departure time"
4. "Set low cost time slot"
5. Set rate begin.
6. Set rate end.
The vehicle can also start the charging process
before the selected time window begins or end
it after the selected time window finishes. The
starting point of the charging process is ad‐
justed so the vehicle can be fully charged and,
if applicable, its climate controlled right up to
the departure time.
Setting the charge current for charging
via a Level 1 charging cable
Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle
must be charged with a different charging cur‐
rent strength, refer to page 218.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Charging rate settings"
Settings are stored. When you change charging
locations you also might need to change the
setting for charging.
Set the charge current strength at other house‐
hold sockets to the lowest level.
Seite 223
Charging the vehicle
MOBILITY
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Stopping the charging process
The charging process can be stopped at any
time by removing the charging cable and con‐
tinued at a later time by connecting the charg‐
ing cable. This enables, for instance the use of
other loads on the power connection or pre‐
vents simultaneous high power from multiple
loads.
Removing the charging cable, refer to
page 221.
Continuing the charging process
If the charging process is interrupted, for in‐
stance through a temporary power failure, the
charging process is automatically continued af‐
ter the interruption.
Terminating the charging process
1.
Remove the charging cable from the vehi‐
cle, refer to page 221.
2. Stow the charging cable as required.
3. Close the charging socket flap.
4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Displays in the instru‐
ment cluster
The charge state indicator light, refer to
page 122, shows the charge state of the high-
voltage battery in the instrument cluster, if the
ignition or drive-ready state is switched on. If
all bars are filled, the high-voltage battery is
fully charged.
Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage sys‐
tem is still under high voltage.
Information regarding the charging process are
shown on the charging screen.
Display Meaning
Display red, without ring: charging
process is being prepared.
Display green, ring flashing green:
charging process is active.
Display green, with ring: charging
process is complete or inactive.
Display red, with ring: fault in the
charging process.
End of charging time or set departure
time.
Departure time set.
Climate control activated at departure
time.
Flashing: ventilation active.
Flashing: heating active.
Flashing: cooling active.
Departure time
Concept
For optimum range and climate control, the de‐
parture time can be set before parking the ve‐
hicle.
General information
With a set departure time, the vehicle is pre-
heated or pre-cooled during the charging proc‐
ess if climate control is set. Climate control out‐
put is reduced during the trip. This increases
the range during electric driving.
Seite 224
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The following settings are possible at departure
time:
▷ Climate control at departure time.
▷ Planning of up to two regular departure
times.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can
be made via the Central Information Display
(CID). Settings for climate control and charging
process are also applied for scheduled depar‐
ture times.
Climate control at departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Precondition for departure"
Setting the departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
4. Set the desired time.
Up to two departure times can be set.
Activating the departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
Set departure times are displayed.
4. For example activate "Departure time 1".
Up to two departure times can be activated.
The set departure time will be deactivated, if
the departure time was ignored three times in
a row.
Climate control
The following settings for climate control of the
vehicle are possible:
▷ Activate stationary climate control immedi‐
ately, refer to page 184.
With stationary climate control activated
and no charging cable connected, the
range is reduced.
▷ Planned climate control at the set depar‐
ture time, refer to page 185.
If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the
high-voltage battery may not be fully
charged at departure time.
Discharged high-voltage
and vehicle battery
General information
In addition to the high-voltage battery, the ve‐
hicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is re‐
quired for operation of the onboard electronics.
If the high-voltage battery is discharged and
the combustion engine is started, air condition‐
ing may be limited.
With a discharged vehicle battery, no operation
of the vehicle is possible.
Starting the vehicle
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the com‐
bustion engine can be started using the battery
of another vehicle and two jumper cables, see
Jump-starting, refer to page 267.
Seite 225
Charging the vehicle
MOBILITY
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Refueling
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 229, prior to refueling.
To also ensure all engine functions under un‐
favorable conditions, for instance steep vehicle
inclinations, at least 3 US gal/10 liters fuel
should be refueled.
Safety information
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured
anymore. There is a risk of damage to property.
Refuel promptly.◀
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily
flammable materials is not maintained, simul‐
taneous charging and filling with fuel can cause
a risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not fill the vehicle with
fuel and charge it simultaneously.◀
Tank vent
Concept
The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel tank.
The fuel tank is designed for special require‐
ments that arise from hybrid operation of the
vehicle, i.e., alternating drive with combustion
engine or electric motor.
General information
In the fuel tank, excess pressure can build up
due to gasoline vapors which are dissipated be‐
fore the fuel cap is opened.
Overview
The switch is located in the storage compart‐
ment of the driver's door.
Tank venting
1.
Switch off drive-ready state.
2. Pull the switch to start the pressure
equalization.
The status of the tank venting is displayed
in the instrument cluster. In rare cases, the
tank venting can last several minutes.
If the tank venting has been completed, a
message is displayed in the instrument
cluster. The fuel filler flap is released for
opening.
3. Open the fuel filler flap.
If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap
after tank venting, pull the switch again.
If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler
flap even after the switch has been pulled,
unlock the fuel filler flap manually, refer to
page 227.
Seite 226
MOBILITY
Refueling
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Fuel cap
Opening
Before opening, vent the tank, refer to
page 226.
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Pay attention that the re‐
taining strap is not jammed or crushed when
closing the cap.◀
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
The release is located in the cargo area.
1.
Remove the cover.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
3. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap. Fuel filler flap is opened.
Follow the following
when refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
Seite 227
Refueling
MOBILITY
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
Safety informationSafety information
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily
flammable materials is not maintained, simul‐
taneous charging and filling with fuel can cause
a risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not fill the vehicle with
fuel and charge it simultaneously.◀
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.
Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact
with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environ‐
ment. There is a risk of damage to property.
Avoid overfilling.◀
Seite 228
MOBILITY
Refueling
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Fuel
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter, for instance helps make a cold start eas‐
ier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐
ing.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
refuel or add the following in the case of gaso‐
line engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.◀
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.◀
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that
does not comply with the minimum quality.◀
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting
and stalling, especially under certain environ‐
mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐
perature and high altitude, may occur.
Seite 229
Fuel
MOBILITY
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.◀
Recommended fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 91.
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated
performance and consumption values.
Minimum fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Seite 230
MOBILITY
Fuel
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
WARNING
A tire with too little or no tire inflation
pressure may heat up significantly and sustain
damage. This will have a negative impact on
aspects of handling, such as steering and brak‐
ing response. There is a risk of an accident.
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and
correct it as needed, for instance twice a month
and before a long trip.◀
Tire inflation pressure specifications
In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 232, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure
specifications in the tire inflation
pressure table
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
tires or tires at the same temperature as the
ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
when the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has
not been exceeded.
Seite 231
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine, refer to page 231, the intended
tire inflation pressure levels for the
mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates
from the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
onto the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/
160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 232, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
COOPER SE
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/55 R 17 97 H
M+S Std/RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
225/50 R 18 95
W RSC
225/50 R 18 95 H
M+S RSC
225/50 R 18 95 V
M+S A/S Std/RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for op‐
timum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 233, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 232
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
COOPER SE
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/55 R 17 97 H
M+S Std/RSC
2.3 / 33 2.7 / 39
225/50 R 18 95
W RSC
225/50 R 18 95 H
M+S RSC
225/50 R 18 95 V
M+S A/S Std/RSC
2.5 / 36 2.9 / 42
Tire identification marks
Tire size
205/45 R 17 84 V
205: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
84: load rating, not for ZR tires
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐
wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR –
on the certification label on the driver’s door
pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be
greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross
Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear
GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3817
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
3817: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire
on the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 3817 38th week, 2017
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Seite 233
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli‐
mate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under control‐
led conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐
droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger ve‐
hicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 237, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter operation.
Seite 234
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required
minimum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are marked
on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indi‐
cator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-
profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.
There is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is
suspected while driving, immediately reduce
speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not
repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
placed.◀
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving
over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section,
the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a
danger of accidents and property damage. If
possible, drive around obstacles, or drive over
them slowly and carefully.◀
Changing wheels and
tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
Seite 235
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, for instance due to contact with the body
due to tolerances despite the same official size
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manu‐
facturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that
you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.◀
WARNING
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will
have a negative impact on the vehicle's han‐
dling and on the function of a variety of sys‐
tems, such as ABS or DSC. There is a risk of an
accident. To maintain good handling and vehi‐
cle response, use only tires with a single tread
configuration from a single manufacturer. The
manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that
you use wheels and tires that have been rec‐
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have
the original wheel/tire combination remounted
on the vehicle as soon as possible.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same level of per‐
formance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible
maximum speed in the field of view. The label
is available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 236
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐
tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further
information is available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure
and correct, if needed.
Storing tires
Air pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under
restricted conditions even in the event of a
complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels are composed of tires that are self-
supporting to a limited degree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with
RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Seite 237
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire. Only remove
foreign objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
TPM wheel electronics replaced at the next
opportunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Overview
Storage
The Mobility System is located in a bag on the
right side trim in the cargo area.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
Seite 238
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accu‐
mulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger
to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure
sufficient ventilation.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 minutes.◀
Filling
1.
Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover
of the sealant container. Do not kink the
hose.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder
on the compressor housing, ensuring that it
engages audibly.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
Seite 239
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
5. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
6. With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to
fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor
at this point.
Checking and adjusting the tire
inflation pressure
Checking
1.
Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of
at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant
container
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in
suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
reached
1.
Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
5. With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
Seite 240
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar
cannot be reached, contact your dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
reached, see Minimum tire inflation pres‐
sure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1.
Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed
in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1.
Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least
2.0 bar.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with the
ignition switched on or the engine run‐
ning, switch on the compressor.
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the
button on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 144.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 139.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
General information
The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter‐
mined certain wheels and tires to be suitable
for operation on the vehicle. Mounting of snow
Seite 241
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
chains on these wheels and tires is not permit‐
ted.
Safety information
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of damage to property. Do not
mount snow chains.◀
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
wheel does not always need to be changed im‐
mediately when there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure due to a flat tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
DANGER
Supports such as wooden blocks under
the vehicle jack may prevent it from achieving
its load capacity due to its restricted height. The
load capacity of the wooden blocks may be ex‐
ceeded, causing the vehicle to tip over. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
supports under the vehicle jack.◀
WARNING
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac‐
turer, is provided in order to perform a wheel
change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is
not designed for frequent use; for example,
changing from summer to winter tires. Using
the jack frequently may cause it to become
jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only use the
jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in
the event of a breakdown.◀
WARNING
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for
example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possi‐
ble, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-
resistant surface.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the ve‐
hicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. When
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐
serted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.◀
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. While the vehicle is raised,
do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull
abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel re‐
moved by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 242
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away
when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to
the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suitable
objects, for instance a rock, under the wheels
of both the front and rear axles against the roll‐
ing direction.
Lug bolt lock
Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 257.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the
lug bolt.
Screwing on
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening tor‐
que is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
screwing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
Seite 243
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on the equipment version, get
tools and the emergency wheel from the
vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning light at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the marked positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with the described hand position and
do not change this position while using the ve‐
hicle jack.◀
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or
lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehi‐
cle jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack
as soon as the vehicle jack is under load
and continue turning the vehicle jack crank
or lever with one hand.
Seite 244
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire
surface of the jack is in contact with the
ground and the wheel in question is raised
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclock‐
wise to retract the vehicle jack and lower
the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se‐
curely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area, if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 245
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Coolant reservoir, high-voltage technology
4 Oil filler neck
5 Jump-starting, positive terminal
6 Jump-starting, negative terminal
7 Unlocking, charging cable
8 Coolant reservoir, engine
Seite 246
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle components
and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of
personal and property damage. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that, in the
effort to avoid such risks, work in the engine
compartment be performed by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.◀
WARNING
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components in
the engine compartment can also move with
the vehicle switched off, for instance the radia‐
tor fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach
into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
clothing and hair away from moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these
areas.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
NOTE
When the hood is closed, it must engage
on both sides. Pressing again can damage the
hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
Open the hood again and then close it energet‐
ically. Avoid pressing again.◀
Opening the hood
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Seite 247
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Closing the hood
Let the hood fall from approx. 16 inches/40 cm,
arrow.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 248
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Engine oil
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling by taking a detailed measure‐
ment.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear, de‐
pending on the engine oil level.
Safety information
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
Electronic oil measure‐
ment
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance
when taking curves aggressively, regularly per‐
form a detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the Control
Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the
combustion engine running.
Seite 249
Engine oil
MOBILITY
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Displaying the engine oil level
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be
possible to calculate a measured value. In this
case, the measured value for the last, suffi‐
ciently long trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehi‐
cle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Drive-ready state is established.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐
lector lever position N or P and accelerator
pedal not depressed.
▷ The combustion engine is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1.
"My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 251.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐
tion and drive-ready state before adding en‐
gine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful in‐
gredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Follow the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s
Seite 250
MOBILITY
Engine oil
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 246.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 247.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise, arrow.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the cap.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Safety information
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use oil additives.◀
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of damage to property. When selecting an en‐
gine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the
correct oil rating.◀
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL, API SM, or API SN.
Viscosity grades
Gasoline engine:
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. The suitable viscosity
grade is indicated on a label in the engine com‐
partment.
Viscosity class SAE 0W-20 is only suitable for
particular engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 251
Engine oil
MOBILITY
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not exceed the service data in‐
dicated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 252
MOBILITY
Engine oil
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Coolant
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. Do not
allow additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Coolant level
Concept
The vehicle features two cooling circuits. Al‐
ways check the coolant levels of both coolant
reservoirs and refill as needed.
Overview
The coolant reservoir is in the engine compart‐
ment, refer to page 246.
Open the hood, refer to page 247.
Checking
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
coolant reservoir.
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
Seite 253
Coolant
MOBILITY
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the
filler neck.
Adding
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Close the cap.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 254
MOBILITY
Coolant
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Maintenance
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
MINI maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS
uses these to calculate the need for mainte‐
nance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 119, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for
US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Book‐
let for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require‐
ments.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
Seite 255
Maintenance
MOBILITY
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
ous engine misfiring within a brief period
can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con‐
verter.
Seite 256
MOBILITY
Maintenance
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Replacing components
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The bag containing the onboard vehicle tool kit
is located beneath the cargo floor panel.
After use, secure the bag with the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
Wiper blade replacement
Safety information
NOTE
The window may sustain damage if the
wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade in‐
stalled. There is a risk of damage to property.
Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper
blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper with‐
out a wiper blade installed.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing out
the wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade
must engage audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Seite 257
Replacing components
MOBILITY
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Rear wiper blade
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper arm.
3. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade
must engage audibly.
4. Fold down the wiper arm.
Light and bulb replace‐
ment
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you have appropriate work performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or if it has not been described here.
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 258.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 258.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have
cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. When working
on the lighting system, switch off the lights in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
NOTE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a
clean cloth or something similar, or hold the
bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
light glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched
on, increasing humidity forms, for instance wa‐
Seite 258
MOBILITY
Replacing components
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
ter droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Front halogen lights, bulb replacement
Overview
Halogen headlights
1 High beams
2 Low beams
3 Turn signal
Bug light
1 Parking lights
2 Daytime running lights
3 Fog lights
High beams
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 258.
Bulbs: H7
1. Open the hood, refer to page 247.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.
3. Tilt the bulb holder up, arrow 1, and pull it
out of the headlight toward the rear, ar‐
row 2.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
5. Install the new bulb with the bulb holder in
reverse order of removal. In doing so, en‐
sure that the bulb tab is correctly posi‐
tioned in the headlight housing and the
bulb holder perceptibly engages.
6. Check the position of the bulb through the
headlight glass.
7. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Make sure that the lid engages.
Low beams
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 258.
Seite 259
Replacing components
MOBILITY
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Bulbs: H7
1. Turn the steering wheel.
2.
▷ On the left facing the driving direction:
turn the cover clockwise and remove it.
▷ On the right facing the driving direc‐
tion: turn the cover counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclockwise,
and remove it.
4. Tilt the bulb holder down, arrow 1, and pull
it downward out of the headlight, arrow 2.
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
6. Install the new bulb with the bulb holder in
reverse order of removal. In doing so, en‐
sure that the bulb tab is correctly posi‐
tioned in the headlight housing and the
bulb holder perceptibly engages.
7. Check the position of the bulb through the
headlight glass.
8. Install the covers. Make sure that the covers
engage.
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 258.
Bulbs: PWY24W
1. Turn the steering wheel.
2.
▷ On the left facing the driving direction:
turn the cover clockwise and remove it.
▷ On the right facing the driving direc‐
tion: turn the cover counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Unscrew the inner cover counterclockwise,
and remove it.
Seite 260
MOBILITY
Replacing components
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, ar‐
row 1, and remove, arrow 2.
5. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder,
turn counterclockwise and remove.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the covers in
the reverse order. Make sure that the cov‐
ers engage.
Parking lights/fog lights/daytime
running lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 258.
Bulbs:
▷ Parking lights: W5W
▷ Daytime running light: PSX24W.
▷ Fog light: H8.
Replacing the bulbs
1. Pull the cover forward out of the bumper.
2. Remove the screws and take out the front
light.
3. Remove the bulb holder.
▷ Parking lights: turn the bulb holder, ar‐
row 1, counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Daytime running lights: squeeze the
upper and lower locks of the bulb, ar‐
row 2, and remove the bulb.
For better accessibility, remove the bulb
of the fog light as needed.
▷ Fog lights: turn the bulb, arrow 3, coun‐
terclockwise and remove it.
Seite 261
Replacing components
MOBILITY
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
4.
▷ Parking lights: pull the bulb out of the
fixture.
▷ Fog lights and daytime running lights:
disconnect the bulb from the cable.
5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
The daytime running lights bulb holder en‐
gages audibly, first below, then above.
LED front lights, bulb replacement
General information
The following lights feature LED technology:
▷ Daytime running lights
▷ High beams
▷ Low beams
▷ Cornering light
▷ Parking lights
▷ Fog lights
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Overview
Position of the headlights
1 Turn signal
2 Daytime running lights
3 Low beams/high beams
4 Cornering light
LED bug light
1 Parking lights
2 Fog lights
Turn signal
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 258.
Bulbs: PWY24W.
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 247.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, ar‐
row 1, and remove, arrow 2.
Seite 262
MOBILITY
Replacing components
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
4. Press the bulb gently into the bulb holder,
turn counterclockwise and remove.
5. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Side tail lights
2 Center brake light
3 License plate light
Side tail lights
1 Brake lights/tail lights
2 Turn signal
3 Reversing lights
Side LED tail lights
1 Brake light
2 Tail lights
3 Turn signal
4 Reversing lights
Side tail lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 258.
▷ Bulb, brake lights/rear lights, tail lights:
P21W
▷ Bulb, brake lights/LED tail lights: H21W
▷ Bulb, turn signal: P21W
▷ Bulb, reversing lights: P21W
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.
3. Through the opening, loosen the plug con‐
nector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.
Seite 263
Replacing components
MOBILITY
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Press the latches together, arrows 1, and
remove the bulb holder.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights.
▷ Arrow 2: turn signal.
▷ Arrow 3: reversing light.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
Central brake light and license plate
lights
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 258.
The lights feature LED technology. In the case
of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 258.
Bulb: WY5W
1. Push the side turn signal forward in the
driving direction, arrow 1, and swing it out‐
ward, arrow 2.
2.
▷ On the left facing the driving direction:
turn the bulb holder clockwise and re‐
move.
▷ On the right facing the driving direc‐
tion: turn the bulb holder counterclock‐
wise and remove.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Insert the bulb holder.
5. Insert the rear side turn signal, arrow 1, and
swing it forward, arrow 2.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
Seite 264
MOBILITY
Replacing components
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after
the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐
tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐
tures will be available without restriction and
any Check Control messages displayed which
relate to comfort features will disappear.
Safety information
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐
erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are
compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐
stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐
ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s
service center.◀
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator light.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
▷ Steptronic transmission: when parked for
long periods of time in selector lever posi‐
tion D, R or N.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 268, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop or
take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Seite 265
Replacing components
MOBILITY
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Accessing the fuses
The fuses are located in the glove compart‐
ment.
1.
Open the glove compartment.
2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop replace
the fuses.
Seite 266
MOBILITY
Replacing components
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Hazard warning flash‐
ers
The button is located above the Control Dis‐
play.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Roadside Assistance
General information
Roadside Assistance can be reached around the
clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐
tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the tailgate.
To remove, loosen the brackets.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
Vehicles with hybrid drive cannot be used for
jump-starting.
Seite 267
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
during connection.◀
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that no body contact oc‐
curs.◀
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive terminal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
A special connection on the body acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
1.
Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Establishing drive-ready state
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Establish the drive-ready state for the vehi‐
cle to be started as usual.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
Seite 268
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
attempt in order to allow the discharged
battery to recharge.
3. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Safety information
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of damage to property. The vehicle
should only be transported on a loading plat‐
form.◀
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
danger area, push it for a short distance at a
speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.
Roll or push, refer to page 106, the vehicle.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or
a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing
vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
cur. There is a risk of damage to property. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the
following:
Seite 269
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the
vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 257, are together in the cargo
area.
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there may be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
Screw thread for tow fitting
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in
the front and rear of the vehicle on the right
side with respect to the direction of travel.
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
What to do after an acci‐
dent
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. After an accident, do not touch
Seite 270
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
any high-voltage components such as orange
colored high-voltage cables or parts that are in
contact with exposed high-voltage cables.◀
WARNING
Fluids in the high-voltage battery are cor‐
rosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch flu‐
ids escaping from the high-voltage battery.◀
General information
After an accident, compliance with the follow‐
ing safety precautions is required with regard
to the high-voltage system:
▷ Secure the crash site.
▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or
firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is
equipped with a high-voltage system.
▷ Engage selector lever position P, set the
parking brake, and switch off the ignition
and drive-ready state.
▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting.
▷ Do not inhale any gases escaping from the
high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle.
Seite 271
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Care
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the
hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
Safety information
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high. There
is a risk of damage to property. Maintain suffi‐
cient distance and do not spray too long con‐
tinuously. Follow the operating instructions for
the high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There
is a risk of damage to property. Follow the fol‐
lowing instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ With rod antenna: unscrew the rod antenna
to avoid rod antenna breakage.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.◀
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
Steptronic transmission
In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able to
roll freely.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 106.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal is sounded when an attempt is made to
lock the vehicle.
Seite 272
MOBILITY
Care
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
Activate drive-ready state, refer to page 90.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated during
braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper
blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
MINI recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health. There is
a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior,
open the doors or windows. Only use products
intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
structions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to these
influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte finish.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Seite 273
Care
MOBILITY
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐
uum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐
erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber
cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a
risk of damage to property. Ensure that any
Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
only water and suitable cleaning agents for
cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,
such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease re‐
movers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly
with water.◀
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Light lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the
safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger
Seite 274
MOBILITY
Care
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for clean‐
ing the safety belts.◀
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
NOTE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of
the Head-up Display, dampen the microfiber
cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, refer to
page 126.
Long idle times and long-term vehicle
storage
Concept
For idle phases that last several weeks, park the
vehicle with a fully charged battery if possible.
Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days
if the electric range is exhausted.
With storage times of up to three months, if
possible plug the vehicle into a compatible
power source or park it in a nearly fully charged
state.
General information
Your dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop can advise
you on what to consider when storing the vehi‐
cle for longer than three months.
Safety information
NOTE
The high-voltage battery can be dam‐
aged by excessive discharge. There is a risk of
damage to property. Before storing the vehicle
for an extended period, ensure that the high-
voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle
period, connect the vehicle to a charging sta‐
tion at a compatible charging location. If neces‐
sary, the high-voltage battery will be charged
automatically. Make sure that the charging
process takes place. Regularly check the charge
state.
Seite 275
Care
MOBILITY
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer
than three months with a charge state below
approx. 50 %.◀
Seite 276
MOBILITY
Care
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Seite 277
Care
MOBILITY
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
FIND ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Technical data
Vehicle features and op‐
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for instance due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval documents, on labels on
the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna,
roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for instance due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.
MINI Countryman
Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.9/2,005
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.7/1,822
Height inches/mm 61.4/1,559
Length inches/mm 169.8/4,314
Wheelbase inches/mm 105.1/2,670
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.5/11.4
Seite 280
REFERENCE
Technical data
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Weights
MINI Countryman
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,016/2,275
Load lbs/kg 926/420
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,458/1,115
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,646/1,200
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 364/165
Capacities
MINI Countryman US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 9.5/36.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 229.
Seite 281
Technical data
REFERENCE
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates after the edito‐
rial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line:
▷ Information: vehicle identification number,
refer to page 12.
Seite 282
REFERENCE
Appendix
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Seite 283
Appendix
REFERENCE
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 155
Accessories and parts 8
Accident, what to do 270
ACC, see Camera-based cruise
control 159
Acoustic pedestrian protec‐
tion 94
AC quick charging cable, see
Level 2 charging cable 220
Activated-charcoal filter 183
Activating, drive-ready
state 91
Active Cruise Control, see
Camera-based cruise con‐
trol 159
Active Guard, see Intelligent
Safety 146
Adapting to the course of the
road, hybrid system 112
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 152
Additives, oil 251
Adjustments, steering
wheel 83
Advance climate control, see
Stationary climate con‐
trol 184
After washing vehicle 273
Airbags 136
Airbags, indicator and warning
light 138
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 178, 182
Air conditioner 177
Air conditioning 178, 181
Air, dehumidifying, see Air
conditioning 178, 181
Air distribution,
manual 179, 182
Air flow, air conditioner 178
Air flow, automatic climate
control 182
Air pressure, tires 231
Air vents, see Ventilation 183
Alarm system 67
Alarm triggering 67
Alarm, unintentional 68
Alertness assistant 153
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 236
Alternative oil types 251
Antifreeze, washer fluid 104
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 155
Anti-slip control, see DSC 155
Anti-theft protection, lug
bolts 243
App, MINI Motorer’s Guide 44
Approach control warning
with city light braking func‐
tion 147
Approved axle load 281
Apps, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Arrival time 123
Artificial engine noise, see
Acoustic pedestrian protec‐
tion 94
Ash tray 190
Assistance for the combustion
engine 95
Assistance when driving
off 158
AUTO intensity 181
Automatic climate con‐
trol 180
Automatic Curb Monitor 82
Automatic deactivation, front-
seat passenger airbags 138
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 131
Automatic locking 66
Automatic recirculated-air
control 182
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 105
Automatic unlocking 66
Automatic vehicle wash 272
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 181
AUTO program, intensity 181
Auto Start/Stop function 92
Auto washing 272
AUX-IN port, position in vehi‐
cle 191
AUX-IN port, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Average fuel consump‐
tion 123
Average speed 123
Axle loads, weights 281
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 74, 75
Backrest, seats 73
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 267
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 265
Battery, vehicle 264
Being towed, see Tow-starting
and towing 269
Belts, safety belts 76
Seite 284
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Beverage holder, cup
holder 194
Blocking, power window 70
Bluetooth connection 36
Bottle holder, see Cup
holder 194
Brake assistant 155
Brake discs, break-in 206
Brake force display 152
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 152
Brake pads, break-in 206
Braking, information 207
Breakdown assistance 267
Breakdown assistance, Road‐
side Assistance 267
Break-in 206
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 33
Bug light 259
Bulb replacement 258
Bulb replacement,
front 259, 262
Bulb replacement, rear 263
Bulb replacement, side 264
Bulbs and lights 258
Button, Start/Stop 89
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 267
C
Calendar, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
California Proposition 65
Warning 9
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 66
Calling up seat adjustment 66
Camera-based assistance sys‐
tems, see Intelligent
Safety 146
Camera-based cruise con‐
trol 159
Camera lenses, care 275
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 171
Can holder, see Cup
holder 194
Care, displays 275
Care, vehicle 273
Care, washing the vehicle 272
Cargo area 196
Cargo area, adapting size 200
Cargo area, enlarging 198
Cargo area lid 60
Cargo area, loading 197
Cargo area, seating sur‐
face 200
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 198
Cargo cover 197
Cargo, stowing and secur‐
ing 197
Cargo straps 197
Carpet, care 275
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust gas system 207
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 255
CD, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Center armrest 194
Center console 18
Central Information Display
(CID) 20
Central Information Display
(CID) operating concept 20
Central instrument cluster,
LED ring 125
Central locking system, un‐
locking, from inside 57
Central screen, see Control
Display 20
Changes, technical, see For
Your Own Safety 8
Changing parts 257
Changing wheels 242
Changing wheels/tires 235
CHARGE, energy recovery 95
Charge indicator, high-voltage
battery 122
Charging battery, see Vehicle
charging 218
Charging cable storage 220
Charging cable, unlocking
manually 221
Charging screen 110
Charging, see Charging the
vehicle 218
Charging, see Vehicle charg‐
ing 218
Charging status, see Display of
the charging status 222
Charging the vehicle 218
Charging the vehicle, see Ve‐
hicle charging 218
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number 12
Check Control 113
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 249
Children, seating position 84
Children, transporting
safely 84
Child restraint system 84
Child restraint system
LATCH 86
Child restraint systems,
mounting 85
Child safety locks 88
Child seat, mounting 85
Child seats 84
Chrome parts, care 274
Cigarette lighter 190
Cleaning, displays 275
Climate control 177, 180
Clothes hooks 195
Coasting 94
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 97
Combi switch, see Wiper sys‐
tem 97, 101
Comfort Access 57
Compartments in the
doors 194
Seite 285
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Compass 188
Compatible devices, see Suita‐
ble devices 36
Compressor 238
Computer, see Onboard Com‐
puter 121
Condensation on win‐
dows 183
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 208
Condition Based Service
CBS 255
Configuring driving pro‐
gram 158
Confirmation signal 66
Connecting device 35
Connecting mobile phone 35
Connecting smartphone 35
Connecting telephone 35
Connections 35
Contacts, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Contact with water, hybrid
system 49
Continued driving with a flat
tire 142, 146
Control Display 20
Control Display, settings 32
Controller 21, 22
Controller operation 22
Control systems, driving stabil‐
ity 155
Convenient closing 53
Convenient opening 53
Coolant 253
Cooling, maximum 181
Cooling system 253
Cornering light 132
Corrosion on brake discs 208
Cosmetic mirror 190
Country timer 128
Coupling, see Pairing 35
Courtesy lights during unlock‐
ing 53
Courtesy lights with the vehi‐
cle locked 54
Cruise control 165
Cruise control, active 159
Cruise control with distance
control, see Camera-based
cruise control 159
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see Cruise
control 165
Cruising range 118
Cup holder 194
Current fuel consumption 118
D
Damage, tires 235
Data memory 9
Data protection, settings 34
Data, technical 280, 281
Date 33
Date display 117
Daytime running lights 132
DCC, see Cruise control 165
Deactivating drive-ready
state 91
Deactivation of the hybrid sys‐
tem 49
Defrosting, see Defrosting the
windows 179
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 183
Defrosting the windows 179
Dehumidifying, air 178, 181
Deleting personal data 35
Deletion of personal data 35
Departure times, stationary
climate control 185
Destination distance 123
Device list 35
Digital clock 117
Digital compass 188
Dimensions 280
Dimmable exterior mirrors 82
Dimmable interior mirror 83
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 97
Display, electronic, instrument
cluster 110
Display, engine tempera‐
ture 123
Display, GREEN Mode 213
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 133
Displays 109
Displays, care 275
Displays, hybrid system 111
Disposal, coolant 254
Disposal, vehicle battery 265
Distance control, see PDC 167
Distance to destination 123
Divided screen view, split
screen 27
Drive-off assistant 158
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 155
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 146
Drive-ready state 89
Drive-ready state, activat‐
ing 91
Drive-ready state, deacti‐
vate 91
Drive-ready state in detail 90
Driver profiles 63
Driver profiles, exporting pro‐
files 65
Driver profiles, importing pro‐
files 65
Driving Dynamics Control, see
MINI Driving Modes
switch 157
Driving Excitement,
SPORT 124
Driving instructions, break-
in 206
Driving instructions, hybrid
system 212
Driving mode, GREEN 213
Driving modes 157
Driving notes, general 206
Seite 286
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Driving on poor roads 209
Driving on racetracks 210
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 155
Driving tips 206
Driving with combustion en‐
gine, POWER 94
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 155
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 156
DVD, Video, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 155
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 156
E
eASSIST, assistance for the
combustion engine 95
Easy Opener 59
eBOOST, assistance for the
combustion engine 95
eDRIVE button 93
eDRIVE, see Hybrid system 47
Electrical drive-ready state 91
Electric driving, ePOWER 92
Electric driving, MAX
eDRIVE 93
Electric driving, SAVE BAT‐
TERY 94
Electronic displays, instrument
cluster 110
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 249
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 155
E-mail, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 227
Emergency service, see Road‐
side Assistance 267
Emergency unlocking, charg‐
ing cable 221
Energy Control 118
Energy recovery, CHARGE 95
Engine, automatic stop 92
Engine compartment 246
Engine compartment, working
in 247
Engine coolant 253
Engine noise, artificial, see
Acoustic pedestrian protec‐
tion 94
Engine oil 249
Engine oil, adding 250
Engine oil additives 251
Engine oil change 252
Engine oil filler neck 250
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 251
Engine oil types, suitable 251
Engine start, combustion en‐
gine 91
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 267
Engine temperature, dis‐
play 123
Entering a destination, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Entering an address, naviga‐
tion, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Entering a vehicle wash 272
ePOWER, electric driving 92
Equipment, interior 186
Error displays, see Check Con‐
trol 113
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 155
Exchanging wheels/tires 235
Exhaust gas system 207
Exiting a vehicle wash 272
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 82
Exterior mirrors 81
Exterior mirrors, Automatic
Curb Monitor 82
Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐
tion 82
External start 267
External temperature dis‐
play 117
External temperature warn‐
ing 117
Eyes for securing cargo 197
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 113
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 68
Fan, see Air flow 178, 182
Fastening safety belts, see
Safety belts 76
Filler neck for engine oil 250
Finding charging stations, see
Charging stations and points
of interest, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Fine wood, care 274
First-aid kit 267
Flat tire, changing wheels 242
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 144
Flat tire, repairing 237
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 139
Flat tire, warning
light 141, 145
Flooding 207
Floor carpet, care 275
Floor mats, care 275
Fogged up windows 179
Fold-away position, wind‐
shield wipers 100, 103
Seite 287
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Fold back rear seat back‐
rests 198
Foot brake 207
For Your Own Safety 8
Front airbags 136
Front fog lights 133
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 138
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator light 139
Front seats 73
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 144
Fuel 229
Fuel cap 227
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 123
Fuel filler flap 227
Fuel gauge 117
Fuel quality 229
Fuel recommendation 229
Fuel, tank capacity 281
Functions, hybrid system 47
Fuse 266
G
Garage door opener, see
Integrated Universal Remote
Control 186
Gasoline 229
General driving notes 206
General settings 32
Glare shield 190
Glass sunroof, initialize the
system 72
Glass sunroof, see Panoramic
glass sunroof 70
Glove compartment 193
GPS, navigation, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
GREEN Mode 213
GREEN - program, driving dy‐
namics 157
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 281
Ground clearance 208
H
Halogen headlights 259
Handbrake, see Parking
brake 95
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 187
Hands-free kit, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Hazard warning flashers 267
Head airbag 136
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 131
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 131
Headlight flasher 97
Headlight glass 258
Headlights, care 273
Head restraints, front 78
Head restraints, rear 79
Head-up Display 126
Head-up Display, see Memory
function 80
Head-up Display, standard
view 127
Heavy cargo, stowing
cargo 197
High-beam Assistant 132
High beams 97
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 132
High-voltage battery, charge
indicator 122
Hills 208
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 158
Holder for beverages 194
Homepage 6
Hood 247
Horn 16
Hot exhaust gas system 207
Hotline, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
HUD Head-up Display 126
Hybrid system, adapting to
the course of the road 112
Hybrid system, at a glance 47
Hybrid system, automatic de‐
activation 49
Hybrid system, contact with
water 49
Hybrid system, displays 111
Hybrid system, safety 49
Hybrid system, working on 49
Hydroplaning 207
I
Ice warning, see External tem‐
perature warning 117
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 117
Identification marks, tires 233
Identification number, see Ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 12
Ignition off 89
Ignition on 89
Illuminated ring, central in‐
strument cluster 125
Indication of a flat
tire 141, 145
Indicator light, see Check Con‐
trol 113
Individual air distribu‐
tion 179, 182
Individual settings, see Driver
profiles 63
Inductive charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Inflation pressure, tires 231
Seite 288
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Inflation pressure warning,
tires 144
Info Display, see Onboard
Computer 121
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 140
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 144
Instrument cluster 109
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 110
Instrument lighting 133
Integrated key 56
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 43
Intelligent Safety 146
Intended use 8
Intensity, AUTO program 181
Interior equipment 186
Interior lights 134
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 53
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 54
Interior mirror 81
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 83
Interior mirror, compass 188
Interior mirror, manually dim‐
mable 83
Interior motion sensor 68
Internet site 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 119
Interval mode 98, 102
In the vicinity of the center
console 18
In the vicinity of the roof‐
liner 19
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel 16
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 244
Jam protection system, glass
sunroof 71
Jam protection system, win‐
dows 69
Jump-starting 267
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 57
Key, see Integrated key 56
Key, see Remote control 52
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 107
Knee airbag 137
L
Label on recommended
tires 236
Label, runflat tires 237
Language, on the Control Dis‐
play 32
Lashing eyes 197
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 86
Leather, care 273
LED ring, central instrument
cluster 125
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 258
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 24
Level 1 charging 223
Level 1 charging cable 220
Level 2 charging cable 220
Light 130
Light-alloy wheels, care 274
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 258
Lighter 190
Lighting 130
Light replacement 258
Light replacement,
front 259, 262
Light replacement, rear 263
Light replacement, side 264
Lights and bulbs 258
Light switch 130
List of all messages 34
Load 197
Loading 196
Locking, automatic 66
Locking, from inside 57
Locking, settings 65
Longer idle phases 275
Long idle times and long-term
vehicle storage 275
Long-term vehicle stor‐
age 275
Low beams 130
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 132
Lower back support 75
Lower back support, mechani‐
cal 74
Lug bolt lock 243
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 209
Lumbar support 75
Lumbar support, mechani‐
cal 74
M
Maintaining charge state,
SAVE BATTERY 94
Maintenance 255
Maintenance require‐
ments 255
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 119
Maintenance system,
MINI 255
Make-up mirror 190
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 113
Seite 289
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Manual air distribu‐
tion 179, 182
Manual air flow 178, 182
Manual brake, see Parking
brake 95
Manual mode, transmis‐
sion 107
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 227
Manual operation, PDC Park
Distance Control 168
Manual operation, rearview
camera 171
Manufacturer of the MINI 8
Map update, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Matte finish 273
MAX eDRIVE, electric driv‐
ing 93
Maximum cooling 181
Maximum speed, display 120
Maximum speed, winter
tires 236
Measurement, units of 33
Mechanical key 56
Medical kit 267
Memory function 80
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 121
Menus, Central Information
Display (CID) 22
Messages 34
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 113
Microfilter 179, 183
MID - program, driving dy‐
namics 157
MINI Connected, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
MINI driving modes 157
MINI eDRIVE, see Hybrid sys‐
tem 47
MINI logo projection during
unlocking 53
MINI maintenance sys‐
tem 255
MINI Motorer’s Guide app 44
Minimum tread, tires 235
MINI Picnic Bench 200
Mirrors 81
Mirror, see Memory func‐
tion 80
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 207
Mobility System 238
Modifications, technical, see
For Your Own Safety 8
Moisture in headlight 258
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 20
Motorer’s Guide app, see MINI
Motorer’s Guide app 44
Mounting of child restraint
systems 85
MP3 player, see Audio, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 16
Multimedia, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Music hard disk, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
N
Navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 78
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 79
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel
cleaner 274
New wheels and tires 235
Notes, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
No-touch closing of the tail‐
gate 59
No-touch opening of the tail‐
gate 59
O
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
tics 256
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 172
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 230
Odometer 117
Office, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication 6
Officially use hybrid sys‐
tem 212
Oil 249
Oil, adding 250
Oil additives 251
Oil change 252
Oil change interval, service re‐
quirements 119
Oil filler neck 250
Oil types, alternative 251
Oil types, suitable 251
Old batteries, disposal 265
Onboard Computer 121
Onboard Diagnostics
OBD 256
Onboard literature,
printed 43
Onboard vehicle tool kit 257
On-call service, see Roadside
Assistance 267
Online Owner's Manual 45
Seite 290
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Opening and closing 52
Opening, from inside 57
Operating menus, Central In‐
formation Display (CID) 20
Operation via the Control‐
ler 22
Operation via touchscreen 24
Optional equipment 7
Outside air, see Automatic re‐
circulated-air control 182
Owner's Manual media 43
Owner's Manual, printed 43
P
Paint, vehicle 273
Panic alarm, see Panic
mode 68
Panic mode 68
Panoramic glass sunroof 70
Parallel parking assistant 173
Park Distance Control
PDC 167
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 208
Parked vehicle ventilation, see
Stationary climate con‐
trol 184
Parking aid, see PDC 167
Parking assistant 173
Parking brake 95
Parking lights 130
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
ing 82
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 171
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 167
Pedestrian protection, acous‐
tic 94
Performance Control 157
Personal profile, see Driver
profiles 63
Person warning with City light
braking function 150
Picnic Bench 200
Plastic, care 274
Poor roads, driving on 209
PostCrash — iBrake 154
POWER, driving with combus‐
tion engine 94
Power failure 265
Power windows 69
Prescribed engine oil
types 251
Pressure, tires 231
Pressure warning, tires 144
Printed onboard literature 43
Profiles, see Driver profiles 63
Programmable memory but‐
tons, Central Information
Display (CID) 28
Protective function, glass sun‐
roof 71
Protective function, win‐
dows 69
Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐
troller 21, 22
Q
Quick charging cable, see
Level 2 charging cable 220
R
Racetrack operation 210
Radiator fluid 253
Radio-operated remote con‐
trol, opening/closing 52
Radio-ready state 89
Radio, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Rain sensor 98, 102
Ratchet straps 197
Rear lights 263
Rear seats 76
Rearview camera 170
Rear window de‐
froster 179, 183
Recirculated-air filter 183
Recirculated-air
mode 178, 182
Recommended fuel
grade 230
Recommended tire
brands 236
Refueling 226
Remaining range 118
Remote control, additional 55
Remote control, loss 55
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 55
Remote control, opening/clos‐
ing 52
Remote control, replacing the
battery 54
Remote control, univer‐
sal 186
Replacing parts 257
Replacing the battery, remote
control 54
Replacing wheels/tires 235
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 13
RES CNCL button, see Camera-
based cruise control 159
RES CNCL button, see Cruise
control 165
Reserve warning, see
Range 118
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 140
Retreaded tires 236
Roadside Assistance 267
Roadside parking lights 131
Rolling code hand-held trans‐
mitter 187
RON recommended fuel
grade 230
Roofliner 19
Roof load capacity 281
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 209
Route, navigation, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
Seite 291
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
RSC Runflat System Compo‐
nent, see Runflat tires 237
Rubber components,
care 274
Runflat tires 237
S
Safe braking 207
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passenger
seat 78
Safety belts 76
Safety belts, care 274
Safety locks, doors, and win‐
dows 88
Safety of the hybrid sys‐
tem 49
Safety switch, windows 70
Safety systems, airbags 136
SAVE BATTERY, electric driv‐
ing 94
Saving fuel 211
Screen, see Control Display 20
Screwdriver 257
Sealant, see Mobility Sys‐
tem 238
Seat heating, front 76
Seating position for chil‐
dren 84
Seat, see Memory function 80
Seats, front 73
Seats, rear 76
Securing cargo 197
Selection list in instrument
cluster 121
Sensors, care 275
Service and warranty 9
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service CBS 255
Service requirements, dis‐
play 119
Servotronic 158
SET button, see Camera-based
cruise control 159
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 165
Settings, locking/unlocking 65
Settings, mirrors 81
Settings on the Control Dis‐
play 32
Shift gate rotary switch 157
Side airbag 136
Signaling, horn 16
Signals when unlocking 66
Sitting safely 73
Size 280
Slide/tilt glass roof 70
SMS, see Short messages, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
SMS text messages, supple‐
mentary 116
Snow chains 241
Socket 190
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 256
Software update 41
Sound output, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Speed, average 123
Speed Limit Info 120
Speed Limit Info, Onboard
Computer 123
Speed limits, display 120
Speed warning 125
Split screen 27
Sport displays 124
SPORT program, driving dy‐
namics 157
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 107
Stability control systems 155
Standard charging cable, see
Level 1 charging cable 220
Standard charging, see Level 1
charging 223
Standard equipment 7
Standard view, Head-up Dis‐
play 127
Start/Stop button 89
Starting the combustion en‐
gine 91
Stationary climate control 184
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Status control display,
tires 140
Status information, Central In‐
formation Display (CID) 27
Status of Owner's Manual 8
Status, vehicle 129
Steering assistance 158
Steering wheel, adjusting 83
Steptronic transmission 105
Storage compartments 193
Storage, tires 237
Storing the charging cable,
see Storage 220
Storing the vehicle 275
Stowing and securing
cargo 197
Suitable devices 36
Suitable mobile phones 36
Summer tires, tread 234
Sun visor 190
Supplementary Owner's Man‐
uals 43
Supplementary SMS text mes‐
sages 116
Switch for driving dynam‐
ics 157
Switch, see Cockpit 16
Symbols 7
Symbols in the status field 27
T
Tailgate 60
Seite 292
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
Tailgate, closing with no-
touch activation 59
Tailgate, opening with no-
touch activation 59
Tailgate via remote control 54
Tail lights 263
Tank unlocking, see Tank
vent 226
Tank vent 226
Technical changes, see For
Your Own Safety 8
Technical data 280, 281
Telephone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Teleservices, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Temperature, air condi‐
tioner 178
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 180
Temperature display for exter‐
nal temperature 117
Temperature, engine 123
Terminal, starting aid 268
Theft alarm system, see Alarm
system 67
Thigh support 75
Tilt alarm sensor 68
Tilting, passenger's side mir‐
ror 82
Time 32
Time of arrival 123
Tire damage 235
Tire identification marks 233
Tire inflation pressure 231
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 144
Tire pressure 231
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 139
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 238
Tires, changing 235
Tire sealant, see Mobility Sys‐
tem 238
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 231
Tires, runflat 237
Tire tread 234
Tone, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Tools 257
Total vehicle weight 281
Touchpad 26
Touchscreen 24
Towing 269
Tow-starting 269
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 139
Traction control 156
TRACTION driving mode, driv‐
ing dynamics 156
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Transmission lock, releasing
manually 108
Transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 105
Transporting children
safely 84
Tread, tires 234
Trip computer 123
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 97
Trip odometer 117
Trip recorder, see Trip odome‐
ter 117
Turning radius lines, rearview
camera 172
Turn signal, front 259, 262
Turn signal, side 264
Turn signals, operation 97
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
placement 263
U
Unintentional alarm 68
Units of measurement 33
Universal remote control 186
Unlocking, automatic 66
Unlocking, settings 65
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 8
Upholstery care 274
USB connection 38
USB interface, position in vehi‐
cle 191
USB port, see USB inter‐
face 191
Use, intended 8
V
Vanity mirror 190
Vehicle battery 264
Vehicle battery, replacing 265
Vehicle, break-in 206
Vehicle care 273
Vehicle care products 273
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 12
Vehicle jack 244
Vehicle paint 273
Vehicle status 129
Vehicle wash 272
Vehicle, washing 272
Ventilation 183
Venting, see Stationary cli‐
mate control 184
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number 12
Voice activation system 29
Voice command response, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Seite 293
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
W
Warning and indicator lights,
see Check Control 113
Warning displays, see Check
Control 113
Warning messages, see Check
Control 113
Warning triangle 267
Warranty 8
Washer fluid 104
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 99, 103
Washing the vehicle 272
Water, hybrid system 49
Water on roads 207
Weights 281
Welcome lights 131
Welcome lights during unlock‐
ing 53
Wheel cleaner 274
Wheels, changing 235
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 231
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 144
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 139
Window defroster,
rear 179, 183
Windows, powered 69
Windshield cleaning sys‐
tem 97, 101
Windshield de‐
froster 179, 183
Windshield washer fluid 104
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 99, 103
Windshield wipers, fold-away
position 100, 103
Windshield wipers, see Wiper
system 97, 101
Winter storage, care 275
Winter tires, suitable tires 236
Winter tires, tread 234
Wiper blades, replacing 257
Wiper fluid 104
Wiper system 97, 101
Wireless charging dock, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Wireless charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Wood, care 274
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Working on the hybrid sys‐
tem 49
Wrench 257
Seite 294
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
01402983594 ue
*BL298359400O*
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402983594 - X/17
